2025 OWNER’S MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment that
are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements
to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install
them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC
shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important
features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio
Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the
website on the back cover.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump
Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the
Roadside
Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is
subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by
FCA US LLC. Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s
Manual for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which
are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................... 7
1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.............................................................13
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL...................................58
3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING........................................................................... 79
4
5 MULTIMEDIA .........................................................................................................129
5
6 SAFETY....................................................................................................................153
6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY............................................................................... 198
7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE................................................................. 216
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 262
9
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE................................................................................268
10
11 INDEX...................................................................................................................... 273
11
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME .............................................................7
SYMBOLS KEY.......................................................8
ROLLOVER WARNING............................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ................................................................... 13
Key Fobs.........................................................13
SENTRY KEY........................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH................................................15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition.......................15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ........................ 17
How To Use Remote Start..............................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ...........................17
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped................................................ 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped .................................................. 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped...........................18
Remote Start Cancel Message..................... 18
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.............................. 18
To Arm The System ....................................... 19
To Disarm The System ..................................19
Rearming Of The System...............................19
Security System Manual Override................ 19
DOORS ................................................................20
Manual Door Locks........................................20
Power Door Locks.......................................... 20
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped)..............................................20
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped............22
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit................... 22
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors................................................ 22
STEERING WHEEL ..............................................23
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column.................23
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped..........23
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED....24
Programming The Memory Feature..............24
Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory...........24
Memory Position Recall.................................25
SEATS ..................................................................25
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 25
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)................. 26
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 27
Heated Seats — If Equipped..........................28
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped........... 29
40/20/40 Rear Seat Armrest— If
Equipped................................................... 29
Head Restraints ............................................29
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED.......................................30
Introducing Voice Recognition...................... 30
Basic Voice Commands.................................31
Get Started.....................................................31
Additional Information................................... 31
MIRRORS.............................................................31
Inside Rearview Mirror...................................31
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors............................. 32
Outside Mirrors.............................................. 32
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If
Equipped................................................... 33
Power Adjustment Mirrors.............................33
Folding Mirrors...............................................33
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 33
EXTERIOR LIGHTS...............................................34
Multifunction Lever........................................34
Headlight Switch............................................34
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped................................................... 34
High/Low Beam Switch................................. 35
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped............................... 35
Flash-To-Pass ................................................ 35
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped............ 35
Headlight Time Delay.................................... 35
Lights-On Reminder.......................................35
Fog Lights — If Equipped............................... 35
Turn Signals....................................................36
Lane Change Assist....................................... 36
Battery Saver Feature....................................36
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................36
Interior Courtesy Lights................................. 36
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS.............. 37
Windshield Wiper Operation......................... 37
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped..............38
Rear Window Wiper/Washer.........................39
2
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped...... 39
CLIMATE CONTROLS .......................................... 39
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions........................................... 39
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions........................................... 42
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).......... 44
Climate Voice Commands............................. 44
Operating Tips ...............................................45
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT.............. 46
Storage........................................................... 46
USB Control....................................................46
Power Inverter — If Equipped........................ 47
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped...........48
WINDOWS ...........................................................49
Power Window Controls.................................49
Automatic Window Features ........................ 49
Reset Auto-Up................................................ 50
Window Lockout Switch................................ 50
Wind Buffeting .............................................. 50
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED...................................................50
Opening And Closing The Sunroof................ 51
Venting Sunroof..............................................51
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade.................................................. 51
Pinch Protect Feature....................................52
Sunroof Maintenance....................................52
HOOD ..................................................................52
Opening The Hood......................................... 52
Closing The Hood...........................................52
LIFTGATE..............................................................53
Unlock/Open The Liftgate ............................ 53
Lock/Close The Liftgate................................ 53
Power Liftgate — If Equipped........................ 53
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .............. 55
Cargo Area Features......................................56
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED.............. 57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER..........58
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions.............................................. 59
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER.................... 60
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions...60
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 61
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls..............................................61
Oil Change Reset........................................... 63
Display And Messages — If Equipped...........64
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......64
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions — If Equipped............. 68
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES...................69
Red Warning Lights........................................70
Yellow Warning Lights....................................72
Yellow Indicator Lights...................................75
Green Indicator Lights...................................75
White Indicator Lights....................................76
Blue Indicator Lights......................................76
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....... 77
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity.............................................77
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ......................... 77
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................79
Normal Starting............................................. 79
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C)................................................. 80
Extended Park Starting................................. 80
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine.....80
If Engine Fails To Start...................................80
Stopping The Engine......................................80
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS.......... 81
PARK BRAKE....................................................... 81
Electric Park Brake (EPB).............................. 81
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................. 84
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 84
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System............................................85
8-Speed Automatic Transmission................. 85
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION.......................88
Jeep® Active Drive.........................................88
SELEC-TERRAIN.................................................. 89
Mode Selection Guide................................... 89
POWER STEERING.............................................. 90
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............... 90
Autostop Mode...............................................90
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop.................................................... 90
3
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode..........................................................91
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.......................................................91
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.......................................................91
System Malfunction.......................................92
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED.... 92
Cruise Control................................................ 92
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).......................93
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 100
Activation/Deactivation...............................100
Traffic Sign Assist Modes............................100
Indications On The Display..........................101
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED......... 101
Operation..................................................... 101
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off...... 102
Indications On The Display......................... 103
System Status..............................................104
System Operation/Limitations....................104
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..............................105
ParkSense Sensors..................................... 105
ParkSense Warning Display........................105
ParkSense Display.......................................105
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense............ 108
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System.....................................................108
Cleaning The ParkSense System................108
ParkSense System Usage Precautions...... 108
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System....... 109
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED.............................................111
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System...................... 111
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation............................. 112
Exiting The Parking Space...........................114
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 115
Active Lane Management Operation..........115
Turning Active Lane Management On
Or Off....................................................... 116
Active Lane Management Warning
Message..................................................116
Changing Active Lane Management
Status...................................................... 117
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA................117
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 118
Zoom View....................................................120
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................ 121
VEHICLE LOADING............................................ 121
Certification Label ...................................... 121
TRAILER TOWING .............................................122
Common Towing Definitions....................... 122
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)...........................123
Trailer And Tongue Weight.......................... 124
Towing Requirements .................................124
Towing Tips ................................................. 126
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)..............................................126
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle.....................................................126
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models........... 126
DRIVING TIPS....................................................126
On-Road Driving Tips...................................126
Off-Road Driving Tips...................................127
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................129
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................129
UCONNECT SETTINGS .....................................129
Customer Programmable Features............130
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED.....................................................151
Radio Operation...........................................151
Media Mode.................................................152
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....152
Regulatory And Safety Information............ 152
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES............................................153
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 153
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA).............. 153
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) — If
Equipped.................................................154
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System......154
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS......................... 160
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped.................................................160
4
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped........................ 163
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).. 165
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...................168
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ......168
Important Safety Precautions.....................168
Seat Belt Systems ...................................... 169
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).....175
Child Restraints .......................................... 186
SAFETY TIPS .....................................................195
Transporting Passengers............................ 195
Transporting Pets ....................................... 195
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .............................................195
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle..................... 196
Exhaust Gas ................................................ 197
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .......................197
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................ 198
SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED...........................198
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 200
Preparations For Jacking ........................... 201
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage.............201
Jacking Instructions.................................... 202
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED................... 205
JUMP STARTING................................................209
Preparations For Jump Start...................... 209
Jump Starting Procedure............................ 210
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY............................ 211
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 212
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE............................ 212
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE.............................213
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 213
Without The Key Fob....................................214
4x4 Models.................................................. 214
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.........214
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)............................................215
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)........................215
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.................................. 216
Maintenance Plan....................................... 216
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................. 219
2.0L Engine..................................................219
Checking Oil Level....................................... 220
Adding Washer Fluid................................... 220
Maintenance-Free Battery ......................... 220
Pressure Washing....................................... 220
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE.................................. 221
Engine Oil .................................................... 221
Engine Oil Filter ...........................................221
Engine Air Cleaner Filter..............................221
Air Conditioner Maintenance......................222
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................. 223
Body Lubrication .........................................223
Wiper Blades............................................... 223
Exhaust System ..........................................226
Cooling System............................................ 227
Brake System ..............................................229
Automatic Transmission..............................230
Fuses............................................................230
Bulb Replacement.......................................239
TIRES................................................................. 244
Tire Safety Information ...............................244
Tires — General Information ...................... 251
Tire Types..................................................... 254
Spare Tires — If Equipped...........................254
Snow Traction Devices................................ 255
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................... 256
Tire Rotation Recommendations................257
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...............257
Treadwear.................................................... 257
Traction Grades........................................... 257
Temperature Grades................................... 258
STORING THE VEHICLE.................................... 258
BODYWORK.......................................................258
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........258
Body And Underbody Maintenance............259
Preserving The Bodywork........................... 260
INTERIORS ....................................................... 260
Seats And Fabric Parts................................260
Plastic And Coated Parts.............................261
Leather Surfaces.........................................261
Glass Surfaces ............................................261
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 262
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................ 262
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . 262
Torque Specifications..................................262
FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................263
5
2.0L Engine..................................................263
Methanol .....................................................263
Ethanol.........................................................263
Clean Air Gasoline....................................... 263
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 263
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...................... 264
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles...................................................264
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) And
Liquid Propane (LP) Fuel System
Modifications.......................................... 264
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT)...................................264
Materials Added To Fuel .............................264
Fuel System Cautions..................................265
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................ 265
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS ...................266
Engine Fluids and Lubricants..................... 266
Chassis Fluids and Lubricants................... 266
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................... 268
Prepare For The Appointment.................... 268
Prepare A List.............................................. 268
Be Reasonable With Requests...................268
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE............................... 268
Roadside Assistance...................................268
FCA US LLC Customer Center.....................269
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Care ............... 269
Mexico..........................................................269
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands..............269
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)............. 270
Service Contract.......................................... 270
WARRANTY INFORMATION............................... 270
MOPAR® PARTS................................................270
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS.........................271
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C......................................271
In Canada..................................................... 271
ORDERING AND ACCESSING OWNER’S
INFORMATION.............................................. 271
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS......... 272
GENERAL INFORMATION..................................272
6
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of
the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information,
contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating
procedures that could result in a colli-
sion, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your vehi-
cle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionali-
ty.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while
some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to
be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when
operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
ð
page 69.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
ð
page 70
Brake Warning Light
ð
page 70
Battery Charge Warning Light
ð
page 70
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
ð
page 70
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light
ð
page 70
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
ð
page 71
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
ð
page 71
Engine Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 71
Hood Open Warning Light
ð
page 71
Liftgate Open Warning Light
ð
page 71
Oil Pressure Warning Light
ð
page 71
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Oil Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 71
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
ð
page 71
Transmission Fault Warning Light
ð
page 72
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 72
Vehicle Security Warning Light
ð
page 72
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
ð
page 72
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
ð
page 72
Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
ð
page 72
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
ð
page 73
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light
ð
page 73
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
ð
page 73
Active Lane Management Warning Light
ð
page 73
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
ð
page 73
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
ð
page 73
Low Fuel Warning Light
ð
page 73
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
ð
page 73
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL) Warning Light
ð
page 73
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
ð
page 73
Service 4WD Warning Light
ð
page 74
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
ð
page 74
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
ð
page 74
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
ð
page 74
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
ð
page 75
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
ð
page 75
4WD Lock Indicator Light
ð
page 75
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light
ð
page 75
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator Light
ð
page 75
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
ð
page 75
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
ð
page 75
Green Indicator Lights
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
ð
page 76
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
ð
page 75
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light
ð
page 75
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
ð
page 75
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light
ð
page 75
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Front Fog Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Sport Mode Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
ð
page 76
White Indicator Lights
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
ð
page 76
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
ð
page 76
12 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition key fob.
The keyless ignition key fob supports Passive Entry,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
(if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote
power liftgate operation. The keyless ignition key fob
supports vehicles equipped with a START/STOP ignition
button. The keyless ignition key fob also includes an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key
fob.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20
m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
● The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
● With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at 2 mph
(4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
Key Fob
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — Panic Button
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow
ð
page 272.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door. If selected within Uconnect
Settings, pushing the unlock button twice within five
seconds will unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock button
once
ð
page 129.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN
or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
● The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
● These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the
key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are
blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
● Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
● Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
● Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
Key Fob:
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the key
fob and pulling the emergency key out with your
other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat-blade
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
WARNING!
● The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
● If you think a battery may have been swallowed
or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
(Continued)
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● K
eep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
● Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
● When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
● Emergency keys must be ordered to the correct key
cut to match the vehicle locks.
● It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine.
The system does not need to be armed or activated.
Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key
fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. If a valid key
fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with
the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut
off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
v
ehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
ð
page
272
.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
● The engine is stopped.
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available.
ON/RUN
● Driving mode.
● All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.).
START
● The engine will start.
NOTE:
If the ignition stat
e/mode does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key
fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
WARNING!
● When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Ke
yless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal
and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from
starting the vehicle.
● For information on normal starting, see
ð
page
79
.
● When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
“Ignition or Accessory ON” will display in the cluster.
16 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of approximately 328 ft
(100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
ð
page 272.
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for
a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
● With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes.
● Remote Start can only be used twice.
● If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
● For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
● The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Liftgate closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● Battery at an acceptable charge level
● Panic button not pushed
● Syst
em not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security Light flashing (if equipped)
● Ignition in the OFF position
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
● Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again,
or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15
minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
NOTE:
● For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter
‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the
vehicle.
● For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will show in the
instrument cluster display until you push the START/
STOP ignition button.
● To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system
will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes
or less. The timing is dependent on the ambient
temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will
automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defroster will automatically turn on in cold weather
conditions. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed in the
Comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129
. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
● In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
● In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
● In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
ð
page 39.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
● Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
● Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
● Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
● Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
system is armed, interior switches for door locks and
18 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the
system, the Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals:
● The horn will pulse
● The turn signals will flash
● The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
NOTE:
● The Vehicle Security system is factory adjusted to
standards from different countries.
● The Vehicle Security system is a complementary
security system developed to hinder the occurrence
of vehicle theft and prevent vandalism. It does not
prevent the theft of your vehicle; the system is a
deterrent.
● The Vehicle Security system does not monitor glass
breakage or the movement of objects or people
inside the vehicle. The alarm does not intervene in
the case of vehicle tilt variations when it is parked.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push the lock butt
on on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
● Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
ð
page 20.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Vehicle
Security Light (located in the lower left portion of the
instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every
three seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock button on
the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will
flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is
closed, then slow down to every three seconds.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
ð
page 20.
● Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm
the system.
NOTE:
● The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
● The V
ehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone
enters the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after approximately 90 seconds, and then the
Vehicle Security system will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked from inside the
vehicle by using the door lock knob.
Manual Door Lock Knob
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward until the lock indicator
is shown. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the lock indicator is hidden. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden. If the door lock button is locked
(lock indicator visible) when you shut the door, the door
will remain locked. Therefore, make sure the key fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
● Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
● The manual door locks will no
t lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
● F
or personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
● When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with a Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in the
OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause severe personal injuries or
death.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position, and any door or the liftgate
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
doors and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE ENTRY
(IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature
of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
● Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129.
● The key fob may not detect the Passive Entry system
if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other
20 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
electronic device; these devices may block the key
fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking and unlocking the vehicle.
● If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing,
or there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
● The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
● If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security
system.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or Passenger’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
either front door handle, grab the door handle to unlock
the door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
● Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
ð
page 129.
● All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
● A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
● A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
● A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle and
it does not detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside
the vehicle, then the vehicle will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
f
ollowing conditions are true:
● The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
● Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
● There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5
ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, push the Passive
Entry lock button located on the outside door handle to
lock the vehicle doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
● After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entr
y door handle.
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle
unlocking.
● If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-
Safe)" remains active/functional.
● The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release handle to open.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed
in P
ARK.
4. Any door is opened.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM —
REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the
dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on
a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by
using the outside door handle even if the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NO
TE:
● When the Child-Pr
o
t
ection Door Lock syst
em is
engaged, the door can be opened only b
y using the
22 GETTING T
O KNO
W Y
OUR VEHICLE
outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
● After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
● After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
● For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate
the door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden
(unlocked position), roll down the window, and open
the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
R
emember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with
the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door
Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the
doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of
the vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left
inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the control handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within
the Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the
instrument panel below the radio. You can access the
button through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
● Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 18.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions
must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
● Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type of material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position
settings for the following features:
● Driver seat position
● Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
● A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The memory setting switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
● The se
t (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
● The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switches
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing
profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
and then push the desired memory button (1 or 2)
within five seconds. The instrument cluster display
will display which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed
to recall one of two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Memory Linked To FOB” feature through the Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 129.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then within five seconds push and
release the button labeled (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within 10
seconds.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is
not in PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or
the unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired
memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● It is danger
ous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Be sure e
veryone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front
seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion,
near the floor.
Front Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback,
lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against y
our chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch
up to the instrument panel). The fold-forward seatback
has a softback surface that you can use as a work
surface when the seat is folded forward and the vehicle
is not in motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
WARNING!
Do not place luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-
Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
still maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING!
● It is e
xtremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO LOWER THE REAR SEAT
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on either
side of the upper outer edge of the seat.
Rear Seat Release Lever
1 — Seat Belt Guide
2 — Seatback Release Lever
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback completely
forward.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator while in the
unlocked position. Once the seat is locked in, the red
indicator will no longer be visible.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's
seat and/or power passenger seat. The power seat
switch and power seat recliner switch are located on
the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the
power seat switch to adjust seat height, angle, or
forward/rearward position. Use the power seat recline
switch to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the
seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move
in the direction of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and
rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or
rearward. The seatback will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the
lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
● When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the vehicle’s
ignition in the RUN position.
● The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile of the Driver Memory Settings
ð
page 24.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129
.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
● Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
(Continued)
WARNING!
overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You
can gain access to the control buttons
through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
● Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If your vehicle is equipped with a medium heat setting:
● Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
If the HI level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The LO level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 18.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seat
back are fans that draw the air from
the passenger compartment and move air
through fine perforations in the seat cover
to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in
higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to
the control buttons through the climate screen or the
controls screen.
● Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
● Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
● Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
If your vehicle is equipped with a medium fan setting:
● Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
● Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED.
● Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
● Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 18.
40/20/40 REAR SEAT ARMREST— IF
EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a
rear armrest with cup holders, pull the rear armrest tab
to release it from the seat and pull forward.
Rear Armrest
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driv
er, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of
the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front two way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see an
authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions: up or
down. When the center seat is being occupied, the
head restraint should be in the raised position. When
there is no occupant in the center seat, the head
restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
v
ehicle to properly protect the occupants.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s
Voice Recognition (VR) system.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menus of your 10.1-inch touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display system. If
not, you have the Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Display
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s Wake
Up word, “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Jeep®”. The factory
default Wake Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can
be reprogrammed through the Uconnect Settings. After
the beep, say:
● “
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
● “
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
● “
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system. You can also use the
system’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice recognition.
The Wake Up word can be set through the Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 129.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
● Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
● Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
● Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button
or say the “Wake Up” word, wait until
after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
● You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
● You can also interrupt the help message or system
prompts by speaking. This feature is called “barge-
in” and can be set through the Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call,
And Send Or Receive A Text. For Vehicles Not
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button To
Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently
In Progress
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2024 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
ð
page 272.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the
windshield with a counterclockwise rotation. No tools
are needed for mounting. The rearview mirror can be
adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the
windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation. No
tools are needed for mounting. The rearview mirror can
be adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear
view. If your vehicle is equipped with an on/off button
on the mirror, the mirror will default to on and can be
turned on/off through the touchscreen.
You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror feature on
or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror (if
equipped). If your vehicle is not equipped with an on/off
button, the auto dimming feature is always on.
Automatic Dimming Button
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the mirror cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor
is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a
much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL — IF
EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper
outer corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with
the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
POWER ADJUSTMENT MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the
desired mirror: (L) or (R). Then push the switch in the
direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Neutral Position
2 — Left Mirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position (If Equipped)
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the
neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding — If Equipped
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding
Mirror function, rotate the control switch to the power
folding position. Rotating the control to the left, right,
or neutral position will return the mirrors to the driving
position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and
vice versa), the movement direction is reversed.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Driver
Memory Settings (if equipped)
ð
page 24.
FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated whenever
you turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped)
ð
page 39.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing
lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if
equipped), instrument panel lights, interior lights, and
fog lights (if equipped).
Scan me
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Front Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Front Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlights, parking lights and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent for headlights, parking
lights and instrument panel lights operation. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the
engine is started and remain on unless the headlamps
are turned on or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
● For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side),
or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard
warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
— IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of a
digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
● The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can
be turned on or off through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129
.
● Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the
vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on
the windshield or camera lens will cause the system
to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last
detent for automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also
on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90
seconds.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn
off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the
headlights or parking lights on, or placing the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
● The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate
this feature. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position prior to placing the ignition in the OFF
position, there is no need to turn the headlight
switch to off to activate Headlight Delay.
● The headlight delay timing is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the
ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the fog light
button. To turn off the front fog lights, either push the
fog lights button a second time or turn off the headlight
switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights
or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the
turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through
the Uconnect system
ð
page 129.
TURN SIGNALS
Mo
ve the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
● If either light remains on and does not flash, or there
is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb.
● A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
five times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER FEATURE
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior
lights were switched on manually or are on because a
door is open.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
front doors are opened, or when the dimmer control
is rotated to its farthest upward position.
The front map/reading lights are turned on by the
switches in the center of the overhead console.
Overhead Light Switches
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were turned on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove compartment light and
the cargo area light. To restore interior light operation,
either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, or
push the light switch on and then back off.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of
the instrument panel.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or down will
adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights
ONLY when the parking lights or headlights are turned
on, AND ONLY if the built in light sensor determines
that the ambient light levels are low enough that the
backlighting should be enabled.
36 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness of
the ambient light located in the overhead console, door
handle lights, lights under the instrument panel, door
map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
Ambient lights are only enabled when the headlights
are activ
e.
Ambient Light Dimmer
Ambient Light Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Illuminated Entry — If Equipped
The Illuminated Entry feature allows you to activate the
low beam, parking lights, and side marker lights for 25
seconds when the vehicle is unlocked (through the key
f
ob or the Passive Entry door handles [if equipped]).
This feature can be activated or deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129.
NOTE:
● When a door is open with the feature active, the
activation of the lights is extended for five seconds.
● The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked or
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of
the steering column. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For
information on the rear wiper/washer, see
ð
page
39
.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two detent
positions for intermittent settings. The first intermittent
wiper interval is 10 seconds. The second intermittent
wipe interval is based on vehicle speed. Rotate to the
third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth
detent for high wiper operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Push Lever Forward & Hold For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Pull Lever & Hold For Front Washer Operation
5 — Push Lever Upward For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades fr
om returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once
the lever is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The washer function must be used in order
to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
ð
page 223.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the multifunction lever to one of two detent positions
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most
sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
● The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
● The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
● Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
● The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for
the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under
the following conditions:
●
Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is in Rain
Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled from OFF to
ON, the auto wiper will be suppressed until vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper
switch is moved out of and back into the Intermittent
wipe position.
●
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The Rain
Sensing system will not operate if the NEUTRAL gear
is selected at speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less
unless the wiper switch is moved or the gear selector
is moved out of NEUTRAL.
38 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle
and has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, Rain Sensing wiper operation can resume,
if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper has different operation
modes:
● Intermittent mode
● Synchronous mode (at half speed of the front
window wipers) when the front window wipers are
operating
● Continuous mode
● Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wipers are active
and the REVERSE gear is selected, the wiper will turn
on for one wipe
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting,
the wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once
the lever is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under the
following conditions:
●
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case
of a cold weather manual start with full front defrost,
and when the ambient temperature is below 33°F
(0.6°C).
●
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the
rear defrost is turned on and when the ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
● Activation By Remote Start Operation (If Equipped)
— When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch
Display Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch
Display Automatic Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser. If the
problem persists, please contact an authorized dealer.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The
A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode
is not recommended.
NOTE:
● After 25 minutes of continuous use, Recirculation
mode will automatically shut off for two minutes to
allow fresh air intake inside the cabin to maintain
sufficient oxygen levels.
● Recirculation mode will function in this way, in either
automatic or manual override mode.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the current setting. The
AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on.
This feature automatically controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual override mode and automatic
modes
ð
page 44.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button,
or push and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost
indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for the best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging performance. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the Climate
Control system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Control Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on.
SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Mode Control regulates the airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution outlets
are: instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the Mode button to change the airflow distribution
mode.
Touchscreen
Press one of the MODE buttons to change the airflow
distribution mode.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost, side window demister outlets, and
panel outboard outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the
front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system
will return to the previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is ideal for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield. A slight amount of air is
also directed through the panel outboard outlets.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the OFF
button on the faceplate to turn the Climate
Control ON/OFF.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch
Display Manual Climate Controls
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch
Display Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the
Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
● For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,
but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent
fogging of the windows.
● If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
● If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke,
odors, dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation
may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can
be deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode
to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
is disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode
causes the LED in the control button to blink and then
turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Press and release the touchscreen button,
or push and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost
indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the
front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system
will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the
air forced through the climate system.
Push the red button on the faceplate,
or touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate,
or touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Mode Control
Push the Mode Control button to change
the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the
front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system
will return to the previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is ideal for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate to turn the Climate
Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the temperature
control buttons. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
● It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
● The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature.
To provide you with maximal comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase
in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
● “
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
● “
Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
44 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
ð
page 258.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper De-Icer is a heating element
located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions
are met:
●
Activation By Front Defrost
● Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper De-Icer activates automatically when
the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient
temperature is below 33°F (6°C).
●
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (6°C) the
windshield wiper De-Icer is activated. Exiting Remote
Start will resume its previous operation. If the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and
operation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and blow-
er on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Ad-
just the controls as need-
ed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
The wiper De-Icer activates automatically during a
cold weather manual start with full defrost, and
when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (6°C).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep win-
do
ws clear
.
Cold Weather
Se
t the mode contr
ol t
o
(Floor Mode). If wind-
shield fogging starts to
occur, move the control
to
(Mix Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glo
ve
compartment open may result in injury in a collision.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which can hold
cell phones, PDAs, and other small items. The center
console can slide forward and rearward for comfort.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
com
partment lid in the open position. Driving with
the console compartment lid open may result in
injury in a collision.
USB CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front USB Ports
1 — Type C USB Port
2 — Type A USB Port
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Different scenarios are listed below when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports:
● “A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
● “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
● “Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
● The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing the artist, track title, and album
information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information
may not be present on the radio display.
● The device can be controlled using the radio buttons
to play, and browse the contents of the device.
● The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB port.
The second row USB ports can be used to charge an
external device.
Charge Only Rear USB Ports
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current
to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 150 W. Certain video game consoles
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
NOTE:
If not equipped with a Power Inverter, the vehicle may
be equipped with a 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary Power
Outlet.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Do no
t insert any objects into the receptacles.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi®
wireless charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi®
wireless charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve
or a specialized back plate can be purchased from your
mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer.
Please see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
● No Light: Charging pad is idle or sear
ching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi®
standard.
● Blue Light: Device is detect
ed and is charging.
● Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object is
detected.
● Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
● The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START
position in order for the phone to charge.
● To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
● Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
● If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
● Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
48 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
● iPhones
®
equipped with Magsafe
®
may affect the
charging function, and may cause higher phone
temperature.
● Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad
so that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
● Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
● Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during
charging such as slowing down the rate of charge.
In certain instances, the device may shut down for
a brief period of time (when the device reaches a
certain temperature). If this happens, it does not
mean there is a fault with the wireless charging pad.
This may just be a protective measure to prevent
damage to the phone.
● The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In
this case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
● Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging
pad or within 6 inches (1
5 cm) of it. Doing so can
cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob.
Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Controls
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on each passenger
door trim panel. The window controls will operate only
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
do
wn briefly and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
The timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ in the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down briefly, then release, and the window will
go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push the switch
briefly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down or pull the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the
window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout switch (the
indicator light on the switch will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window lockout
switch again (the indicator light on the switch will turn
off).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occur
s with the rear windows open, open the front
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
— IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Shade Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Ne
ver leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition
of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
in the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
● In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
● Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
● Do not use the sunroof and its related parts
for supporting and/or grabbing purposes. Serious
personal injury may result to fingers and other
body parts as well as damage to the sunroof.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open positions,
comfort stop position and full open position. The
comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize
wind buffeting when driving with side windows closed
and sunroof open. If the sunshade is in the closed
position when initiating a sunroof open or vent
command the sunshade will automatically open to the
half open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Express Open/Close - Push the switch to open and
release it within one-half second and the sunroof will
open to the comfort stop (partially opened) position
and automatically stop. Push the switch and release
it again, and the sunroof will open to the full open
position then automatically stop.
Pull the switch to close and release it within one-
half second and the sunroof will completely close
automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close - Push and hold the switch to open.
The sunroof will open to the comfort stop (partially
opened) position and automatically stop. Push the
switch and hold it again, and the sunroof will open to
the full open position then automatically stop.
Pull and hold the switch to completely close the sunroof
from any position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof
will remain in a partially opened position until the
switch is operated and held again.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the vent switch within one-half
second and the sunroof will move from the closed
position to the vent position. This is called “Express
Vent.” During Express Vent operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial open
position, Express Vent operation is not available. You
must push and hold the vent switch to cycle the sunroof
from a slide open position to the vent position. Sunroof
movement will stop if the switch is released prior to the
sunroof reaching the vent position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
SUNSHADE
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
half open and full open. When opening the sunshade
from the closed position, the sunshade will always
stop at the half open position regardless of express or
manual operation. The switch must be pushed again to
continue on to full open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch to open and release it within
one-half second and the sunshade will open to the half
open position and stop automatically. Push the switch
and release it again, and the sunshade will open to the
full open position and stop automatically.
Pull the sunshade switch to close and release it within
one-half second. If the sunroof is in closed position, the
sunshade will full close automatically from any position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot
be closed beyond the half open position. Pulling the
sunshade switch when the sunshade is in the half open
position will automatically close sunroof prior to the
sunshade closing.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch to open. The
sunshade will open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and hold the switch again, and the
sunshade will open to the full open position.
Pull and hold the sunshade switch to close. If the
sunroof is in closed position, the sunshade will fully
close from any position. If the sunroof is open or
vented, the sunshade will close to the half open
position and stop. Pulling and holding the switch again
will close both the sunroof and sunshade completely.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and
the sunshade will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening
of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected,
the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the
obstruction if this occurs. Next, pull the sunroof close
switch and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Location
(Underneath Instrument Panel)
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The safety latch
release lever is located behind the front edge of
the hood at the center. Reach in at the center
of the hood with a palm facing the ground. Once
contact is made with the safety latch release lever,
push it toward the passenger side of the vehicle to
fully release the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
NOTE:
● Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
● Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
● While lifting the hood, use both hands.
● You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
CLOSING THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from the
point where the props no longer hold the hood open.
WARNING!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Mak
e sure hood is fully closed. Never drive
vehicle unless hood is fully closed
and latched.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 10 – 14 inches
(30 – 36 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure
hood is fully closed and latched. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, and latched.
LIFTGATE
UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in one of several ways:
● Key fob (if equipped with power liftgate)
● Outside handle
● Button on overhead console (if equipped with power
liftgate)
● Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped)
The overhead console switch and key fob (if equipped)
will release the liftgate when the liftgate is unlocked or
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be
unlocked.
Liftgate Entry
To Unlock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door unlock button on
the door panel to unlock the liftgate. The manual door
locks on the doors will not unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
e
xhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing
handle and pull in a downward motion to close the
liftgate.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key fob because the liftgate may be
locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door lock button on the
door panel to lock the liftgate. The manual door locks
on the doors will not lock the liftgate.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the liftgate button on the key fob.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open or close the
power liftgate. You can also open the liftgate by pushing
the electronic liftgate release handle
ð
page 20.
Using any of the following ways:
● When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will
open.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
● When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close.
● When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the front
overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the
liftgate can be closed by pushing the liftgate button
located on the left rear trim panel. If the liftgate is
in motion, pushing the button again will reverse the
liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing, and an audible chime can
be heard (if enabled in the Uconnect Settings
ð
page
129
).
The key fob and the overhead console switch will open
the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside
handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, and a valid
Passive Entry key fob is within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pulling the outside handle will unlock and open
the liftgate.
NOTE:
● Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key fob because the liftgate may
be locked.
● Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the
door panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the
exterior door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock
the liftgate.
● The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle
doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing
the electronic liftgate release, depending on the
select
ed setting in the Uconnect system
ð
page
129
.
● The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0
mph (0 km/h).
● The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or
ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
● If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple
obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will
automatically stop and must be opened or closed
manually.
● There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
● The power liftgate must be in the full open position
in order for the rear liftgate close button, on the left
rear trim near the liftgate opening, to operate. If the
liftgate is not fully open, push the liftgate button on
the key fob to fully open the liftgate and then push it
again to close.
● If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed
a second time while the power liftgate is opening,
the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual
operation.
● If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in the
detection of an obstruction.
● Allo
w the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate
the liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
● Driving with the lif
tgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
● If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
● During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and
latched before driving away.
● Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the
liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free
activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion
under the vehicle activation zone in the general
location below the rear license plate. The activation
zone is about 1.8 ft (0.5 m) from side to side. Do not
move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the
sensors may not detect the motion.
NOTE:
Activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped with
or without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate
will open after approximately one second, or close after
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129
.
NOTE:
● Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
no
t within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to
any kicks.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
ð
page 129.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned off
during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash, and
vehicle service.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated
by any metallic object making a similar in-and-out
motion under the rear fascia/bumper, such as
cleaning using a metal broom.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
● If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
● There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
● If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated
manually.
● The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
● If the liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time (approximately one hour), the liftgate may
need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality
.
WARNING!
● Driving with the lif
tgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
● If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
● During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and
latched before driving away.
● Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the
liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props
when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 300
lb (136 kg).
Cargo Load Floor Positions
The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three different
levels to create more space in the cargo area. These
positions are: upper, center, and lower.
NOTE:
The lower position is not available in vehicles equipped
with either a compact spare tire, or a full size spare tire.
The center position is not available in vehicles equipped
with a full size spare tire.
To change the level of the load floor, pull upward on the
load floor handle, pull the floor outward, and place the
back of the floor into the desired position. Lower the
front of the floor into place.
Cargo Load Floor Positions
1 — Upper Position
2 — Center Position
3 — Lower Position
Raising The Load Floor
To raise the load floor for access to the Tire Service Kit,
or spare tire (if equipped), pull upward on the load floor
handle.
Do not raise the floor beyond the point of resistance. In
vehicles equipped with a power liftgate, forcing the floor
upward can damage the floor and vehicle’s trim panel.
Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate)
1 — Raised Floor Maximum Height
2 — Raised Load Floor
To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the floor
handle, pull the floor outward, then position the floor
upright with the bottom fitting on top of the floor
positioning brackets. Push the top of the floor down
firmly to secure it in this position.
Fully Raised Load Floor Position
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
still maintains some rear seating room
ð
page 25.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
● Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
● To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
(Continued)
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
● Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door
or left door center pillar.
● Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
● Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
● Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or accident.
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the
vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
Rear Storage Bin
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load
on the luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
● Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of
the vehicle.
● Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
● Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It
is recommended to not carry large flat loads, such
as wood panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
● Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as
supplementary tie down points only. Do not use
ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
● The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
ð
page 61.
3. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
Scan me
4. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. It is recommended
to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats
ð
page 227.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
5. Fuel Gauge
● The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 59
3
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. It is recommended
(Continued)
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats
ð
page 227.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
2. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
3. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
● The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY L
OCATION
AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
Depending on your vehicle trim, your instrument cluster
display may vary.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 61
3
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will
illuminate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers,
in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display
is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using the driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
The systems allow the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
● Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
● OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the OK button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Push the Menu button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of the
Home Screen display. Push and hold the OK button
to enter edit mode.
●
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
●
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and submenus.
●
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Display Options — If Equipped
Holding OK will also allow you to change your display to
Digital or Analog.
● Digital theme will be the default theme
● Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press
OK
to reactivate
● Speedometer must always be present
● Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up info
will still be displayed in the main screen area (In this
case the speed moves to the top)
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are
able to select up to five tiles to display information
based on your needs.
● Press the
MENU button for the Home Screen display
Menu Button
● Navigate
Left or Right to highlight desired tile
● Press
OK to select the tile and navigate to the
selected submenu and press OK again to add your
selection to your tile view
● If equipped, the main menu options of the home
screen are Navigation, Vehicle Info, Driver Info,
Audio, and Off Road
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
● Menu Button — If Equipped
Custom Tile Screen
NOTE:
These options may vary based on your vehicle trim
level.
Home Screen Options
●
Navigation — If Equipped
○ Route Set / Route Not Set
○ Trip A / Trip B
●
Vehicle Info
○ Coolant Temp
○ Trans Temp
○ Oil Temp
○ Oil Pressure
○ Battery Voltage
○ Oil Life
○ Tire Pressure
○ F
uel Economy
●
Driver Info — If Equipped
○ Posted Speed Limit Sign
○ Driver Assist
●
Audio
○ Audio Info
●
Off Road — If Equipped
○ Selec-Terrain Status
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
● Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in gray under normal conditions, yellow
for noncritical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
● Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is shown
here.
● Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
● Gear Selector Status (PRND)
● Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
● Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
OIL CHANGE RESET
Use this QR code t
o access your digital
experience.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
● Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position.
To reset the oil change indicator after performing
the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following
procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
3
You can customize your Instrument Cluster Display with
up to five tiles that may consist of the following:
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts
Unbuckled
Driver Seat Belt
Unbuckled
Passenger Seat
Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control
Off
Washer Fluid
Low
Oil Pressure
Low
Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Anti-
lock Brake Sys-
tem
Service Elec-
tronic Throttle
Control
Service Power
Steering
Cruise Off
Cruise Ready ACC Override Cruise Set To
XXX mph or
km/h
Service Shifter Tire Pressure
Screen With
Low Tire(s)
Service Tire
Pressure Sys-
tem
Park Brake En-
gaged
Brake Fluid Low Engine Temper-
ature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Ignition or Ac-
cessory On
Vehicle Not In
Park
Remote Start
Active Push
Start Button
Remote Start
Canceled Fuel
Low
Remote Start
Canceled Door
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Hood
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Lift-
gate Open
Remote Start
Canceled Time
Expired
Remote Start
Disabled Start
To Reset
Service Air Bag
System
Service Air Bag
Warning Light
Door(s) Open Service Trans-
mission
Liftgate Open Hood Open Shift Not Al-
lowed
Vehicle Speed
Too High To
Shift to D
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to R
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to P
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green
or red telltales area on the right.
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of
the main menu. The main display area also displays
pop-up messages that consist of approximately 60
possible warning or information messages. These pop-
up messages fall into several categories:
● Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are then
stored (as long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from the
“Messages” main menu item. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
●
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal
On” (if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if
driver leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
●
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
●
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display
area for five seconds and then returns to the
previous screen. An example of this message type is
“Automatic High Beams On.”
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items. Use the up and
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu
is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
Base/Midline Cluster
Speedometer Vehicle Info Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Trip Stop/Start — If
Equipped
Fuel Economy
Audio Messages Vehicle Settings
— If Equipped
Screen Setup
Premium Cluster
Driver Info Vehicle Info Trip
Off Road — If
Equipped
Audio Messages
Settings
Main Menu
DRIVER INFO — IF EQUIPPED
● Speedometer
●
Driver Assist
SPEEDOMETER
Base/Midline Cluster
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to change the speedometer scale from MPH to
km/h (or vice versa).
Premium Cluster
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Info Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button while the Speedometer Menu item is
selected and press theOK button again to change the
speedometer scale from MPH to km/h (or vice versa).
DRIVER ASSIST
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Base/Midline Cluster
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to select.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
● Distance Setting Change
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
● ACC Proximity Warning
● ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
ð
page 93.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
3
Premium Cluster Only
The Driver Info menu item contains the following
submenu items:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located
on the steering wheel) and the following will display in
the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Premium Cluster
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Driver Info menu icon is displayed in the
1. Tire Pressure
● If tire pressure is correct f
or all tires a vehicle
icon is displayed with tire pressure values in
each corner of the icon.
● If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon
and the tire pressure values in each corner of
the icon with the pressure value of the low tire
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
● If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
● Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset
ð
page 165.
2. Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temperature — Automatic
Transmission Only
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4. Oil Temperature
Displays the level of oil temperature.
5. Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Premium Cluster
●
Fuel Economy
ð
page 67
○ Average Fuel Economy
○ Current Fuel Economy/Sailing Active Status
Indication
ð
page 76
○ Range To Empty
NOTE:
Signif
icant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
●
Gauge Summary
○ Coolant Temp
○ Trans Temp
○ Oil Temp
○ Oil Pressure
○ Battery Voltage
●
Tire Pressure
○ If tire pressure is
OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner
of the ICON.
○ If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON
and the tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
○ If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
○ Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset
ð
page 165.
●
Stop/Start Status
○ Display the status of the Stop/Start system.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
instrument cluster display, Push and release the OK
button. Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to select.
The Driver Assist screen indicates the current status of
ACC, Active Lane Management and Highway Assist/
Assist+/Pilot. Push and release the
OK button again to
change between Zoomed In and Zoomed Out view
(“Press OK to Zoom In” will display when in Zoomed Out
view/“Press OK to Zoom Out” will display when in
Zoomed In view).
The instrument cluster display displays the current
Active Lane Management system settings. The
information displayed depends on Active Lane
Management system status and the conditions that
need to be met page 115.
VEHICLE INFO (CUSTOMER INFORMATION
FEATURES)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Vehicle Info Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left
or
right arrow button to cycle through the Vehicle Info
submenus and follow the prompts on each screen as
needed.
Base/Midline Cluster
FUEL ECONOMY
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button
to reset average fuel economy feature.
● Average Fuel Economy– The display shows the
average fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L)
since the last reset.
● Current Fuel Economy/Sailing Active Status
Indication – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while driving
as well as indicating when the Idle Coasting feature
if enabled and active
ð
page 76.
● Range To Empty – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value
is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving
distance, the Range display will change to a “LOW
FUEL” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message
and a new Range value will display. Range cannot be
reset through the
OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading
will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the
vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
TRIP INFO
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button
to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display
the following:
● Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
● Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
Trip B since the last reset.
● Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
OFF ROAD — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Off Road Menu icon/title is highlighted.
Push the
left
or right arrow button to scroll the
submenus.
Terrain Status
● Selec-Terrain Status
STOP/START – IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
AUDIO
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
STORED MESSAGES
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the
left or right arrow button will allow you to scroll
through the stored messages.
SCREEN SETUP
Push and release the up
or do
wn
arrow button
until the Screen Se
tup Menu Icon/Title is highlight
ed in
the instrument clust
er display
. Push and release the
OK
butt
on to ent
er the submenus and f
ollow the pr
ompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed
in the instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
NOTE:
Based on vehicle trim level and current status, some of
the following options may not be available.
Base/Midline Cluster
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Date Time Ignition State
(Keyless Ignition
Only)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
3
Upper Left or Upper Right
Range To Empty Average Econo-
my
Current Econo-
my
Center
None Range to Empty Date
Average Econo-
my
Current Econo-
my
Outside Temp
Compass Menu Title Audio Info
Time Trip A Distance Speedometer
Trip B Distance
Restore Defaults
● Ok
● Cancel
Premium Cluster
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Range To Empty Date
Outside Temp Current Econo-
my
Ignition State
Upper Left or Upper Right
Time Compass Average Econo-
my
Trip A Trip B
Odometer- Premium Cluster Only
● Show
● Hide
Favorites
Driver Info Vehicle Info Trip
Off Road Audio Stored Messag-
es
Settings
Defaults
● Restore
● Cancel
VEHICLE SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up
or
down arrow button
until the Vehicle Setup Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. This menu item allows you to
change the settings for the following:
● Seat Belt R
eminder
● Passenger Air Bag Disable: a selection of Passenger
Air Bag Disable (ON/OFF) may be made if a child
restraint must be installed in the front seat
Safety And Assistance
● Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill
Start Assist system
NOTE:
Other vehicle settings not present within the cluster
may have been moved into the radio
ð
page 129.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER MODE
MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating,
electrical load reduction actions will take place to
extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle.
This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-
essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk of
battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart
after the current drive cycle.
68 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Security
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
● The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
● If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
ð
page 70
.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
● Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
● Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
● Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
● HVAC System
● 150W Power Inverter System
● Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
● The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
● T
urning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
● Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar devices.
● Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
● The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
● The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
● The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
● The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights,
chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
● Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged into power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio se
ttings (volume)
After a trip:
● Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
● Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
● The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
display first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
3
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault with the air bag, and will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not
on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem
is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
12V battery is not charging properly. If it
stays on, there may be a malfunction with
the battery or charging system. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light — If
Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising
drivers to take a break in time. Once Drowsy
Driver is detected, A pop-up will display
continuously until the driver presses the OK button to
clear.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until
the condition is no longer true.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
ð
page 90.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a problem with the ETC system. If a problem
is detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending
on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this
light will illuminate and a single chime will
sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service
ð
page 212.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
3
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound
ð
page 168.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster display
and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission
fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
message remains after restarting the engine.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
a high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the Vehicle
Security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out
with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
● The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
● This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,
the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system has
shut the fuel off.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
Active Lane Management Warning Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning Light
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is crossing
the lane marker.
Service Active Lane Management
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not
operating and requires service. Please see
an authorized dealer.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low
ð
page 227.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is 13.5
gal (51 L) or 15.8 gal (60 L), the Low Fuel
Indicator Light will turn on when the fuel
level goes below 1.5 gal (5.6 L) or 1.7 gal
(6.6 L) respectively.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
(MIL) Warning Light
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park
over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC is not
operating and needs service
ð
page 93.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
3
Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend you drive
to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the Forward Collision Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer for
service
ð
page 163.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light — If Equipped
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants
may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an
(Continued)
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels
ð
page 88.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Lock mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together, forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed
ð
page 88.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will
illuminate if a fault is detected, it will
be indicated by a yellow HOLD! indicator
light that will stay on as long as the fault
condition exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Vehicle
Security system has detected an attempt to
break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a
problem with the system is detected. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no vehicle
in front detected
ð
page 93.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is SET and a vehicle in front
is detected
ð
page 93.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a complete
stop without you having to keep your
foot on the brake pedal. Once engaged a
green HOLD indicator will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on
ð
page 34.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
3
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set to the desired speed
ð
page 92.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
ð
page 34.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
● A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
● Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not set
ð
page 92
.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature
is turned on. The light will be on solid when
HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed
when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and
the vehicle speed is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). If
these conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/
off.
Idle Coasting Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The Idle Coasting/Sail feature works by
allowing engine speeds to drop to idle,
saving fuel. The indicator is only seen
when Idle Coasting is chosen and active. In
addition, there is indication when this feature is active
on the Fuel Economy menu screen on your Instrument
Cluster Display.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management system
is ON, but not armed, the Active Lane
Management indicator light illuminates
solid white. This occurs when only left, right,
or neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide
only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs on the detected lane line
ð
page 115.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams
are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. When these
systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
● Pr
olonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system.
It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any
emissions tests can be performed.
● If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and
a connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
ð
page 129.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
● If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle
registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD
II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or
a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
3
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
● The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
● The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
previously mentioned test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can
fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
78 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and
if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
Place the ignition switch in the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 10 seconds, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition switch in the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and will automatically
disengage itself when the engine is running. If the
engine fails to start, place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
f
ollowing precautions are not observed:
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/
STOP button again.
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ — With Driver’s Foot Off The
Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter ’n Go™ feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ON/RUN,
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
4
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
follow, these steps starting with the ignition switch in
the OFF position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to change the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW –
22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it when the engine starts. For Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ ignition systems, press and hold
the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/
STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat
the “Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes,
then repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
ENGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, and has not experienced
an Extended Park condition as identified in “Extended
Park Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds.
This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON/RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
● Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
● If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly
ð
page 209.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless Enter ’n
Go™):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition
or push the ENGINE START/STOP button three times
consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the ON/RUN
position.
Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the
ON/RUN position to the OFF position), the power supply
to the accessories are maintained for a period of three
minutes.
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
Opening the driver’s side door with the ignition in
ON/RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the window
switches remain active for three minutes. Opening a
front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to cool
before shutting off the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-
in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
ð
page 266
.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB system that offers
simple operation, and some additional features that
make the parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
● Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
● Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect settings
ð
page 129.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages.
Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE
Warning Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator
on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is
OFF. The Brake Warning Light will not illuminate and
can only be released when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
4
brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition switch is ON/RUN, the transmission is in DRIVE
or REVERSE, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot
on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the car while the parking brake disengages. You may
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, the
BRAKE Warning Light in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do no
t rely on the parking brake to operate
effectively if the rear brakes have been immersed
in water or mud.
● Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking
(Continued)
WARNING!
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
● When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
● Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
Warning Light will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to
a complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the
parking brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle, may cause serious damage to the brake
system. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE Warning Light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB system
is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is below
1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the transmission is
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the Customer
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 129.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
● Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
● There is no attempt to press the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal.
● The seat belt is unbuckled.
● The driver’s door is open.
● The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB switch while the driver’s door is open and
the brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle
reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned
to the OFF position and back to ON/RUN again.
Auto Hold — If Equipped
Auto Hold is a comfort feature that allows the driver
to remove their foot from the brake pedal once the
vehicle has come to a stop. The vehicle must be
held at a standstill for a predetermined amount of
time by hydraulic braking. The EPB will then engage
and continue t
o hold the vehicle at a stop until the
driver applies the accelerator pedal. Auto Hold can be
activated or deactivated by pushing the HOLD button
located on the switch bank.
Auto Hold Switch
The following conditions must be met for Auto Hold to
activate:
● Driver’s door is closed
● Driver's seat belt is fastened
● Vehicle is at a standstill
● Forward gear is selected
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not engaged
● EPB is not applied
● ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto parking
maneuver is not activated
Brake Service Mode
W
e recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer.
You should only make repairs for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. You should only
enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The
actuator retraction can be done easily by entering the
Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings in
your vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
● The vehicle must be at a standstill.
● The parking brake must be disabled.
● The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
● The EPB switch not activated.
● The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position.
● The brake pedal not pressed.
While in Service Mode, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON/RUN.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be
activated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
4
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
● Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
● Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
● Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be
deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
mo
tor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Y
our vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
(N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or
DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
(Continued)
WARNING!
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The transmission will NOT shift out of the PARK position
if the engine is not running even when the brakes are
applied. Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and
the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting
the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
(whether the engine is running or not), and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward.
You must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N), when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds). Select
the DRIVE (D) range for normal driving.
NOTE:
● The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred
miles (kilometers).
● In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects REVERSE (R) while
driving forward), the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control
ð
page 87. Moving the gear
selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode, providing
manual shift control and displaying the current gear in
the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the
gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
AutoStick position will manually select the transmission
gear.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
4
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on
an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
When parking on a steep slope the use of wheel chocks
is recommended.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
(N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
(Continued)
WARNING!
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or
DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● Bef
ore moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
● DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
● When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector, and firmly move the selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
● Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
● With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit
the vehicle.
86 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
ð
page 126.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
ð
page 213.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all forward
gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the
AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
ð
page
87
. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may modify
the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may
illuminate, and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and/or transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch is inhibited until the engine
and/or transmission is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the temperature(s) have risen to a
suitable level.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE (D) position), it can be moved
forward and rearward. This allows the driver to
manually select the transmission gear being used.
Moving the gear selector forward (-) triggers a downshift
and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward
(+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected
gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen,
except as follows:
● 8-speed transmissions will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
● The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
● The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
● You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
● If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
● The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
● Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
● The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled,
AutoStick is not active.
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
4
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may
remain in NEUTRAL (N). The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns
off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset,
authorized dealer service is required.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on your
vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages
automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result
in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch
automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting properly when the vehicle is cold. This
is normal. The torque converter clutch will function
normally once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
JEEP® ACTIVE DRIVE
Your vehicle is equipped with a Power Transfer Unit
(PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs
or additional driving skills required. Under normal
driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the
traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power
is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater
the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power
transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent
to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the Power Transfer Unit.
Four-Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four-wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal
driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of mode when
the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h).
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
4WD Buttons
1 — 4WD LOW (Trailhawk Models Only)
2 — 4WD LOCK
Enabling Four-Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four-wheel drive are
located on the center console and allow you to select
the following:
● 4WD LOCK
● 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk Models Only)
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure
immediate availability of torque to the rear drive axles.
This feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic
in the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled
by the following ways:
● When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
● When the Selec-Terrain switch is moved from AUTO
to any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk Models Only)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road
per
formance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW, see
the following:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the
ON/RUN position or with the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and push the 4WD LOW
button once. The instrument cluster will display the
message “4WD LOW” once the shift is complete.
NOTE:
● Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and then
become active on the buttons until the shift is
complete.
● The instrument cluster display will illuminate the
4WD LOW icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be
stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.
Push the 4WD LOW button once.
SELEC-TERRAIN
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
MODE SELECTION GUIDE
● AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous
operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and
off road. This mode balances traction to ensure
maneuverability and acceleration improvement
● SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability
under conditions of bad weather. For use on and off
road on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads
covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending
on certain operating conditions), the transmission
may use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear)
during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
●
SAND/MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as dry sand and roads
covered by mud or wet grass. The transmission is
set to provide maximum traction.
●
ROCK: (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available
in 4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to
maximize traction and allow the highest steering
capacity for off-road surfaces. This mode gives you
the maximum performance off-road. Use for low
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
Selec-Terrain Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
compared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This
mode also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows
the disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions
permit.
4
NOTE:
● ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
● Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep downhill
control
ð
page 154.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The electric power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect system. Refer to ”Customer
Programmable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed
and the “Service Power Steering” or the “Power
Steering Assist Off – Service System” message is
displayed within the instrument cluster display, this
indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to an
authorized dealer for service. Refer to
ð
page 61.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “Power Steering System
Over Temp” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster display, this indicates
an over temperature condition in the power steering
system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and
let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off
ð
page 61.
NOTE:
● Even if the power steering system is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
● If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal, pressing
the accelerator pedal or shifting out of DRIVE (D) will
automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other engine parts to
handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after
every normal customer engine start. At that
time, the system will go into Stop/Start
Ready.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
● The system must be in Stop/Start Ready state. A
“Stop/Start Ready” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
ð
page 61.
● The vehicle must be completely stopped.
● The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position, and the Stop/Start telltale will
illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer
settings will be maintained upon return to an engine-
running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations
the engine will not stop:
● Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
● Driver’s door is not closed.
● Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
● Battery charge is low.
● The vehicle is on a steep grade.
● Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
90 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
● HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
● Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
● The transmission is not in a forward gear.
● Hood is open.
● Vehicle is in 4WD LOW or N (Neutral).
● Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
● Accelerator pedal input.
● Engine temperature is too high.
● 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
● Steering angle beyond threshold.
● Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set (if
equipped).
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a Stop/
Start Ready state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP
MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
A
utomatically While In Autostop Mode:
● The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
● To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
● HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
● Battery voltage drops too low.
● Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
● A Stop/Start system error occurs.
● 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW or N (Neutral).
● Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
● The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
● The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
● The engine hood has been opened.
● A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual restart
and the EPB may require a manual release (press brake
pedal and press EPB switch)
ð
page 61.
TO MANU
ALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “Stop/
Start Off” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display within the Stop/Start section and the Autostop
function will be disabled
ð
page 61.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an on
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
4
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “Service Stop/
Start System” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
ð
page
61
.
If the “Service Stop/Start System” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
● Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
● In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
● Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CR
UISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
canno
t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the
instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control
is on. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the
instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always turn the system
OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push and release the SET
(+) or SET (-) button. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating the set speed. A
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light, along with set speed
will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator
to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
● Vehicle parking brake is applied
● Stability event occurs
● Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
● Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, will erase the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
saf
ety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently if your
vehicle is not equipped with ACC
ð
page 92.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
● If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
● Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning system.
● Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
ð
page 272.
WARNING!
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is alw
ays the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
4
WARNING!
required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
● The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
● When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
● When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
● When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
● When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
● ACC Proximity Warning
● ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
94 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
● When in 4WD Low
● When the brakes are applied
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
● When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
● When the brakes are overheated
● When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
● When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
● When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
● When ESC Full Off Mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.” Then proceed to setting
the desired speed as described in the next section.
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
The system will also turn off during any of the
conditions listed in “To Turn Off”
ð
page 96.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
(Continued)
WARNING!
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32
km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20
mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
● Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
● If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be
controlling the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
● The brake pedal is applied
● The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
● The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
● The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
● The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
● The vehicle parking brake is applied
● The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
4
● The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
● The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
● Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
● Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
● The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
● The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
● The ignition is placed in the OFF position
● 4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will
show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32
km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0
km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
● If y
our vehicle is at standstill longer than two
seconds, the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the
existing set speed.
● ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
● When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
● The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
● The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation and
necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
96 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one
bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting will show in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane,
the instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Light. The system will then adjust
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
● The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
● The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
● The distance setting is changed.
● The system disengages
ð
page 95.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with A
daptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set
speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle
to a standstill while following a vehicle in front, if the
vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds of
your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will
resume motion without the need for any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill
for approximately three consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be canceled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the parking brake will be activated, and the
ACC system will be canceled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
4
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display the preceding message and
the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
● Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
● Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing
so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
● If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
● Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and
inhibit ACC operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become t
emporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on
the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “ACC Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on
the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstructions, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there may be
an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may
need to intervene. The following are examples of these
types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a cur
ve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed
for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending
on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
A
CC ma
y no
t de
t
ect a vehicle until it is com
ple
tely in
the lane in which y
ou are tra
veling. In the following
lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle
until it's t
oo lat
e f
or the A
CC syst
em t
o tak
e action.
A
CC ma
y no
t detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
4
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles.
For example, ACC will not react in situations where
the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider
this stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not
previously detect movement from it. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data
when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect
recognizable road signs such as:
● Speed limits
● School zones
● No passing zones
NOTE:
● The TSA system will automatically display the road
sign detected in the unit of measurement (mph or
km/h) selected within Uconnect Settings or within
the instrument cluster display.
● If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will
revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the
Navigation system.
● The system always checks the traffic signs indicating
the current speed limit signs. The system is able to
recognize and display up to two different road signs
in the instrument cluster display.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Ev
en if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will
be displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME
screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the
driver when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds
the detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the
instrument cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will
alert the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a graphic
in the instrument cluster display, and by sounding an
audible alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds,
and the visual alert will remain on as long as the
vehicle is exceeding the speed limit.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the TSA
system, the radio is also muted.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
screen, which will show detected speed limit signs), and
no alerts will be issued to the driver.
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument
cluster display, and can display any combination of
signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and
supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending
on what information is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with
an up arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with a
down arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
seconds.
Traffic Signs Recognized
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
Inf
ormation (School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed along
with a newly detected speed limit, indicating special
circumstances of which the driver should be aware.
Available supplemental information includes:
● School
● Construction
● Rain
● Snow
● Fog
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed when
the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle speed exceeds the displayed speed
limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the
instrument cluster display will show a red outline to
alert the driver.
CAUTION!
● Traffic Sign Assist is designed to assist the driver
and is not a substitute for the driver. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to continue to
monitor the speed limit and vehicle speed, and to
operate the vehicle in a manner safe for the road
conditions.
● Functionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● The syst
em may have limited operation or not
work at all in weather conditions such as heavy
rain, hail, and thick fog. Strong light contrasts can
influence the recognition capability of the sensor.
● The area surrounding the sensor must not be
covered with stickers or any other object.
● Do not tamper or perform any operations in the
area of the windshield glass directly surrounding
the sensor.
● Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use
specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid
scratching the windshield.
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist system (ADA) is combined with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers
the vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds
up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system
limitations, see
ð
page 93.
NOTE:
● The driver should always obey traffic laws and speed
limits. Never drive above applicable speed limit
restrictions.
● The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
4
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long as
the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front is maintained. ADA will also keep your vehicle
centered between the lane lines, and monitor for other
vehicles in adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors.
ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to measure
driver attentiveness. ADA requires the driver’s hands
on the steering wheel at all times. The system will
generally aim to keep the vehicle centered in the lane,
but when the driver turns the steering wheel (e.g. to
move farther away from a large vehicle in an adjacent
lane) the system will reduce its control and enter "co-
steering" mode. While in co-steering mode, the system
will provide reduced assistance and allow the driver to
control the path of the vehicle. Once the driver stops
providing input to the steering wheel, the system will
require a few seconds to fully resume lane centering
assistance, especially during curves.
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist system is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road traffic, weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, position
in the lane compared to other vehicles, and brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist system:
● When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g.
rain, snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road
conditions (e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane
markings, etc.).
● When entering a highway off-ramp, when driving
on roads that are icy, snow covered, or slippery.
● When driving during difficult or uncertain
conditions.
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST ON OR
OFF
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button
located on the right side of the steering wheel.
The steering wheel image will display white in
the instrument cluster display until the system is
engaged. If ACC was previously disabled, pushing
this button will activate BOTH ACC and Active
Driving Assist systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the ADA on/off
button, ACC will remain active and ADA will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are
met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA
on/off button, push the SET
(+) button or the SET
(-) button and release when the desired driving
speed is shown in the instrument cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting
by pushing the Distance Increase or Distance
Decrease buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“System Engagement Conditions” in the next section,
the system will engage and the steering wheel image in
the display will change to green.
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
Active Driving Assist
Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering wheel
image, the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster
display will also change to green when ADA is engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met after enabling
the Active Driving Assist system before the system will
engage:
● Active Driving Assist system is enabled
● Driver seat belt is buckled
● System detects visible lane markings
● Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
● Vehicle is centered in lane
● Turn signal is not activated
● Vehicle is not in a tight curve
● Trailer is not connected
● Driv
er has hands on steering wheel
NOTE:
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering wheel
will not satisfy the hands-on condition to engage the
system.
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
● If the system has detected driver inattentiveness,
and has gone through all escalation warnings
● If lane markings are no longer detected
● If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
● If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the blind
spot zone on the same side the turn signal is being
applied)
● If the driv
er applies enough input to the steering
wheel
● If the driver’s seat belt is released
● If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)
● If the Active Driving Assist system on/off button is
pushed again (ADA will turn off)
● If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
NOTE:
● ADA will not enable if the system detects a trailer is
connected to the vehicle.
● Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button will
turn the system off. All other deactivation conditions
will place the system back into the “enabled” state
with the steering wheel indicator displayed in white
until all engagement conditions are met again.
● When the system is deactivated, the system
status indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane
Management will return to its previous state, and
ACC will disable.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Active Driving Assist system status can always be
viewed in the instrument cluster display, and status
changes are shown by changes in color of the system’s
indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
previously described
ð
page 101, the system status
indicator lights will change from green, to yellow, to red.
The following indicators will change in color as warnings
to the driver escalate:
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
4
● Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in
the instrument cluster display)
● Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver attention is not returned, the system will
deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
● ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
● ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the
system is not actively steering and providing speed
control for to the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
● The system detects driver is attentive and is actively
steering and providing speed control for the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
● Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning
the driver to place hands on the steering wheel.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
● Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or
driver take-over is being requested, warning the
driver to place hands on the steering wheel. This
warning is also issued when the system has
detected a tight curve and is warning the driver to
take control.
NOTE:
The driver MUST replace hands on the steering wheel
and take control of the vehicle when the system is
deactivated.
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue
several accompanying warnings intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate a
potential collision.
● Two haptic brake jerk warnings will be issued (red
warning light is being issued).
● A steering wheel vibration warning (if enabled) will
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
example, when driving on a tight curve. The steering
wheel vibration feature can be turned on or off
within the Uconnect system
ð
page 129.
SY
STEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist
feature, requiring driver attention at all times. To
prevent serious injury or death:
● Always remember that the Active Driving Assist
system is a convenience system that cannot
accurately detect all situations. Complete attention
is always required while driving, even when using
the Active Driving Assist system.
● Always remain alert and be ready to take control
of the vehicle in the event that the Active Driving
Assist system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full
functionality as described further before and after
this statement.
● Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
when the Active Driving Assist system is activated.
● Do not use a hand-held device when the Active
Driving Assist system is engaged.
● Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions. The Active
Driving Assist system will not steer to avoid safety
hazards, constructions zones, objects, or road
impediments. You need to take control to steer
and brake the vehicle in such situations, and when
merging into traffic, exiting the highway, making
a turn for crossing traffic, or stopping for traffic
control devices.
● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could interfere
with the hand detection sensors.
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT:
● Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
● Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
slower vehicles, construction zones or equipment,
pedestrians, or animals
● Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
● Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
● Change lanes or turn
● React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component
of the Active Driving Assist system. For ACC system
limitations
ð
page 93.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited
or reduced functionality when one of the following
conditions occur:
● The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
● If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the
suspension, installing different sized wheels or tires)
● Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the
windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear,
and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
(e.g. during a parking maneuver).
NOTE:
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for
controlling the vehicle's movements
ð
page 108.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active in DRIVE or REVERSE, as long as
the system is on. The system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11
km/h) or above. While in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed
is too fast. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in
the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
view. The front sensors detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120
cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
system page 129.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display page 61. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/
or right rear region and the system will produce
a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2
second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
4
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 79 in-
ches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single, 1/2 second,
audible chime is
heard
Audible chime increases as the objects get closer to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume Re-
duced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm) Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches (120-100
cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches (30
cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
4
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Audible Alert Chime None None None
Audible chime increases as
the objects get close to the
vehicle
Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audible tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is
stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
ð
page 129.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and
high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster display
ð
page 61 will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and
it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS"
or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
● Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
108 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc.
are attached to the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting
a close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within
a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
● There may be a delay in the object detection rate if
the object is moving.
● The rear sensors are automatically deactivated
when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow socket. The front sensors stay active
and can provide acoustic and visual warnings. The
rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
(Continued)
WARNING!
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING (SDW) SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system has the function
of detecting the presence of side obstacles near the
vehicle using the parking sensors located in the front
and rear fascias/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed
if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129
.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal
and when selected, with visual indications on the
instrument panel display
ð
page 61.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(in/cm)
Less than 30 in-
ches (76 cm)
30 – 65 inches
(76–165 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Audible alert only when the vehicle
is on course for a collision
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone.
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
4
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and
7 mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be activated/
deactivated via the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect
system. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via
the ParkSense switch, then the side distance warning
system will automatically be deactivated.
Side Distance Warning System Status
1 — System Not Active
2 — System Active
NOTE:
The vehicle needs to be driven approximately one car
length in order for the Side Distance Warning system to
activate.
Operation With A Trailer
The system is automatically deactivated when the
trailer's electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow
hook socket. The rear sensors are automatically
reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
● Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the message in the
instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE
OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition key.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the parking
sensors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is
recommended to remove the removable tow hook
ball assembly and any attachments from the vehicle
when it is not used for towing operations. If you leave
the tow hook fitted when not towing a trailer, the
tow hook could be detected as an obstacle by the
sensors. Contact your authorized dealer to update
the P
arkSense system operations.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
● The v
ehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended
to assist the driver during parallel, perpendicular, and
parallel park exit maneuvers by identifying a proper
parking space, providing audible/visual instructions,
and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is defined as “semi-
automatic” since the driver maintains control of the
accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on
the driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a
vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space
on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side), as
well as exiting a parallel parking space.
NOTE:
● The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed
to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually com
plete the parking maneuver.
● The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor
waves).
● New vehicles from the dealer must have at
least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully
calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve
the performance of the feature.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE PARKSENSE
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time
will disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
● Parking maneuver is complete.
● Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
● Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
● Steering Wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
● ParkSense Park Assist switch is pushed.
● Driver's door is opened.
● Rear liftgate is opened.
● Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow
a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
the maximum amount of shifts, the system will cancel
and the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
● Gear selector is in DRIVE.
● Ignition is in the RUN position.
● ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
● Driver's door is closed.
● Rear liftgate is closed.
● The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions.
● Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15
mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
4
driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the
system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate
the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the preceding conditions are not
present.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING SPACE
ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
or to Switch Maneuver” message will appear
in the instrument clust
er displa
y. Y
ou ma
y select
perpendicular
, parallel, or parallel par
k exit. The arr
ow
buttons on the left side of the steering wheel can be
used to switch parking maneuvers.
Active ParkSense Searching
NOTE:
● When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
automatically search for a parking space on the
passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is
not activated.
● The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
● The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders,
tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
● When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
● The feature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple available
parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last
detected parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and
the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to
move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed
to stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a
standstill (your hands still removed from the steering
wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
surroundings and move backward.
112 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the
steering wheel, before instructing the driver to check
surroundings and complete the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be instructed
to check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the
vehicle into PARK. The message "Active ParkSense
Complete - Check Parking Position" will be displayed
momentarily.
NOTE:
● It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver.
● It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
either when instructed to, or when driver intervention
is required.
● When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up
slowly.
● The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six
shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument
cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
● The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The
system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph
(5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the
system is canceled.
● If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of
your vehicle, look behind and in front of you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up and moving forward. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to pay
attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
4
CAUTION!
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the driver looks
over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system.
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, shift to DRIVE, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, and then use the
steering wheel arrow buttons to select the Parallel Park
Exit feature. After the selection, the system activates
and instructs the driver through the instrument cluster
display about the operations that have to be carried out
to perform the maneuver correctly.
Start Of Maneuver
During the maneuver, the system asks the driver to
shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the
direction you want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel
and use the brake or accelerator pedals while the
system handles the steering automatically for exiting
the parking space. If the driver continues to carry
out a voluntary or involuntary action on the steering
wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or holding the
steering wheel to prevent its movement), the maneuver
will be interrupted.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the
end of the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle
control to the driver.
Important Information
● If the sensors undergo impact which alters their
position, the system operation could be greatly
affected.
● The sensors reach top performance after the vehicle
has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due to the
dynamic tire circumference calculations used for
parking.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
● Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo
noise) due to mechanical noises, for example while
washing the vehicle or in the case of rain, strong
wind, and hail.
● The sensors may not detect objects of a particular
shape or made from particular materials (very
thin poles, trailer beams, panels, nets, bushes,
anti-parking posts, pavements, rubbish bins, motor
vehicles, etc.). Always take great care to check that
the vehicle and its path are actually compatible with
the parking place identified by the system.
114 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
● The use of wheels and tires that are different size to
the original equipment could affect the operation of
the system.
● The operation of the rear sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while the
front sensors stay active and can provide acoustic
and visual warnings. If this situation occurs, Active
Park Assist will not work. The rear sensors are
automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable
plug is removed.
● In "Search in Progress" mode, the system could
incorrectly identify a parking place to carry out
the maneuver (e.g. by a junction, driveways, roads
crossing the direction of travel, etc.).
● In the case of parking maneuvers on roads with
inclines, the performance of the system could be
inferior and it may deactivate.
● If a parking maneuver is being carried out between
two parked vehicles alongside a curb, the system
may cause the vehicle to drive up onto the curb.
● Some maneuvers at very tight bends might be
impossible to be carried out.
● Take great care to ensure that conditions do not
change during the parking maneuver (e.g. if there
are persons and/or animals in the parking place,
moving vehicles, etc.) and intervene immediately if
necessary.
● During parking maneuvers, pay attention to vehicles
approaching from the opposite direction. Always
abide by the law and road regulations.
NOTE:
● Correct system operation is not guaranteed if snow
chains or the compact spare tire are fitted.
● The function only informs the driver about the last
appropriate parking place (parallel or perpendicular)
detected by the parking sensors.
● Some messages displayed are accompanied by
acoustic warnings.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes
while the driver is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60
km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
approaches (or crosses) the lane marking with no turn
signal applied, and the blind spot zone is not occupied,
the ALM system provides warnings to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries. These warnings
include a visual warning in the instrument cluster along
with steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings).
If the driver crosses the lane marking, the system
will either guide the vehicle back to the center of the
lane, provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both,
depending on radio settings.
● The system will suppress visual warnings, steering
vibration (if selected in radio settings), and steering
assistance (if selected in radio settings) when the
driver activates the turn signal, the blind spot zone is
clear of vehicles, and a lane change is occurring.
● If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a
vehicle in the adjacent lane, and the turn signal is
applied in that direction, the BSM LED on the mirror
will flash. If the driver continues to attempt the lane
change, steering wheel torque will be provided to
keep the vehicle within its lane markings.
The driver may manually override the steering assist
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any
time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the Active Lane Management system provides
a visual warning in the instrument cluster, as well
as a steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings), to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out
of the lane, the system provides a flashing visual
warning through the instrument cluster display as well
as a haptic steering wheel vibration (if configured in
Uconnect Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane
boundary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change, and
a vehicle is detected in the BSM zone on that side
of the vehicle, the ALM system provides a warning in
the form of steering assist and/or steering vibration
(depending on radio settings) to guide the vehicle back
to the center of the lane.
NOTE:
4
The Active Lane Management button is
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
Management button (LED turns off). A message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again (LED turns
on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
MESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will indicate the
current lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray when
both of the lane boundaries have not been detected.
System On (Gray Lines)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
● When the system is on and only the left lane
marking has been detected, and the system is
ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a vibration and/or steering assist
warning in the steering wheel if a lane departure
occurs, the left lane line will be green.
● When the system senses the lane line has been
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line will
change to solid yellow and the system will provide
a haptic steering wheel vibration and/or steering
assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
● When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
● When the system is on, the lane lines turn from gray
to green to indicate that both of the lane markings
have been detected. When both lane markings
have been detected, the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and
a vibration and/or steering assist warning in the
steering wheel if a lane departure occurs.
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT ON OR
OFF
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
● When the system senses a lane drift situation, the
left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time, steering
assist warning is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
● When the syst
em senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is
applied t
o the steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
● The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
● If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle
begins to depart the lane at the same time the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects another
vehicle in the BSM zones, the system will provide
a haptic steering wheel vibration and/or steering
assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
STATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Management
system are available within the Uconnect system
page 129.
● Vibration Only
● Steering Assist Only
● Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are for the
intensity of the vibration (hi/med/low), steering assist
warning (hi/med/low), and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/medium/late).
NOTE:
● The system will not apply vibration and/or steering
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety
system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
● The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on
when the ALM system is enabled.
● The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with
a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
Selectable Warning Types:
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the Uconnect
display. Then, select the Controls tab.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
ð
page 129.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay
turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the following
conditions occur: The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13
km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the user
presses the touchscreen X button to exit out of the
camera video display.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected back up path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the
center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning
to a hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in any gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the
display screen, the image will zoom in to four times
the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time
will return the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE,
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear
gray.
● While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
118 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or
a different view is selected through the touchscreen
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which
doors are open. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side
mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
ð
page 129.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
the Rear View and Top View is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View Camera
mode is exited and the last known screen appears
again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There
are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front
and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from
yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
● Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
● Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
● Top View will show which doors are open.
● Open front doors will cancel outside image.
● Open liftgate will cancel rear image while in Top
View.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
rear camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
Front View Plus Top View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
front camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom
View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through
the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the
Rear View screen will return to the last known Surround
View screen. If the Back Up Camera was manually
activated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system, exiting out of the display screen will return to
the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
● The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13
km/h).
● The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
● The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
● The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu
ð
page 129.
NOTE:
● If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
● If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surr
ound Vie
w Camera. Alw
a
ys check
carefully behind y
our v
ehicle, and be sure t
o check
f
or pedestrians, animals, o
ther v
ehicles, obstructions,
or blind spo
ts bef
ore backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue
to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
in any gear selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon
in the upper left of the display screen,
the image will zoom in to four times the
standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the
vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the
camera delay view will display the standard Back
Up Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear
gray.
● While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seal the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
Fuel Filler Pipe
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
B-pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)
number is included on this label and indicates the
Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in
the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately to
be sure that the load is properly distributed over the
front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear
or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably
do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
ð
page 121.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
ð
page 121.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
fr
ont or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The Tongue Weight is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
An electronic TSC, if equipped, recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer TW, just as if
it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches
are commonly used to tow small and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused
WARNING!
● An im
properly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
● Weight-Distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine/Transmission Model Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
2.0L/8-Speed Auto 4WD 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
When towing a trailer, the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lb (100 kg), whichever is lower provided that the operating
speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively
to tow vehicle and trailer stability. TSC and a weight-
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended
for heavier TW and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
4
Weight-Carrying Hitch
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
fr
ont of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on
the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer
to sway severely side to side which will cause loss
of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
● The TW of the trailer.
● The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
● The w
eight of the driver and all passengers.
NO
TE:
R
emember that e
v
er
ything put int
o or on the trailer
adds t
o the load on y
our v
ehicle. Also, additional
fact
ory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s door pillar for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
● Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80
km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
● Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
● When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
● Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
● Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in Neutral. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
● GCWR must not be exceeded.
●
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ TW rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
● Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
● Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
● Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
● Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
● Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
● Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
● For further information
ð
page 244.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
● Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
● An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
● Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
● Do no
t connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
● Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should ha
ve its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
● Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
● Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. For increased engine
braking on steep downhill grades, select the LOW
range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
● Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
● When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
● Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE
TOWING CONDI-
TION
WHEELS OFF
THE GROUND
FOUR-WHEEL
DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED
FRONT NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
● When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
● You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature
is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid
inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The
Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled
via the Cust
omer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4 MODELS
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle
may be towed on flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all
four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power
ð
page 88. This range
should be limited to extreme situations such as deep
snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior
to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a
steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-
off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or
the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water,
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to
sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches
(40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed
in 19 inches (48 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/
h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power
Transfer Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to ensure they
have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be
flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
low gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate
terrain mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary
ð
page
88
. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
because engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but
before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the
loose surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle
stuck/immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping
and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a
hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill
in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of
a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway
by turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This
may provide a fresh traction into the surface and may
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW range or select Hill Descent
Control (if equipped)
ð
page 157. Let the vehicle go
slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against
engine compression drag. This will permit you to control
the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage.
● Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
● Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
● Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
● Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
and propeller shafts.
● After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking performance. Full braking power may not
be available to prevent a collision. If you have
been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions,
inspect and clean the braking components as
soon as possible.
● Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance.
Freeing the wheels of impacted material will likely
rectify imbalance condition.
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5 With
8.4-inch Display or your Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-
inch Display, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
ð
page 268, or refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
● As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of
a security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons
on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate
located in the center of the instrument panel. These
buttons allow you to access and change Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle and
packages.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect syst
em in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob below and to the right of the
screen. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus
and change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the
radio.
MULTIMEDIA 129
5
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
● Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to
the screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons
On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
130 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Daytime
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is daytime. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Nighttime
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is nighttime. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Units This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Dis-
tance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement
independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
MULTIMEDIA 131
5
Setting Name Description
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Navigation Settings This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for further information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are
opened.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
ð
page 146.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
132 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
MULTIMEDIA 133
5
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set
it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness Daytime This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is daytime. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Nighttime This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is nighttime. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Units This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The
available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa,
or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
134 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will
provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Sub-
menu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in
view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW
system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the
FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 135
5
Setting Name Description
Lane Management — Located In Active Lane Management This setting will activate the system that will alert the driver when a lane departure
is detected. If selected, steering assist can be provided. The available options are
“Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”.
Lane Warning — Located In Active Lane Management This setting will set the warning type for Active Lane Management. The available
options are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
Vibration Strength — Located In Active Lane Management This setting will set the strength of the steering wheel vibration. The available options
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Steering Assist Strength — Located In Active Lane Management This setting will set the strength of the steering wheel pull when a lane departure is
detected. The available options are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense submenu This setting will set the warning type for LaneSense. The available options are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense submenu This setting will set the strength of the LaneSense system. The available options are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected.
The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected.
The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual
display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
136 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will provide braking assistance if the Rear ParkSense system senses a
collision with an object.
Active ParkSense Mode This setting will control Active ParkSense functionality between fully autonomous park-
ing and semi-autonomous parking. The available options are “Full Auto” and “Steering
Only”.
Active ParkSense Proximity Chime This setting will turn the Active ParkSense Proximity Chimes on or off. This setting in
only available when Active ParkSense Mode is set to “Full Auto”.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting
will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime”
setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The
available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Drowsy Driver Alert This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes,
indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will vibrate the steering wheel when a lane departure is detected. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 137
5
Setting Name Description
Side Distance Warning This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off and set how the system will
communicate with the user. The “Off” setting will deactivate the system. The “Sound”
setting will provide an audible chime to the user. The “Sound And Display” setting will
provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is
running, or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a
message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will
control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
138 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. You will also
be able to adjust the clock.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or
smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 139
5
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options
are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is
completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off.
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
140 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 141
5
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
● When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Sensitivity This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights depending on the
amount of visible light. The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light
variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the
headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1:
Minimum Sensitivity”, “Level 2: Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivi-
ty”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
142 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Greeting Lights This setting will turn the Greeting Lights on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the
relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Headlight Dip This setting will lower the headlights when driving on the opposite side of the road.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
MULTIMEDIA 143
5
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power
liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
144 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated
or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 145
5
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep the radio running after the engine is turned off. When any door
is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 min” and “20
min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after
the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”,
“1”, “2”, and “3”.
146 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The
available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system
resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Loudness This setting improves the sound quality at lower volumes. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media,
Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 147
5
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is
sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited Pop-Up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited Pop-Up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip
specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
● A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the SiriusXM®
menu.
148 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for
the setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 149
5
Setting Name Description
System Information The follow menus will provide information on your Uconnect system. Select a menu to
view that piece of information.
● Encryption And Credential
● Opening Links
● Version Information
● License Information
● FCC ID
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Apps This setting will delete all of the installed apps if there is an issue with using or
installing an app. The available options are “Back” and “Next”.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
150 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
NOTE:
Performing this function may take several minutes to complete.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projec-
tion. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed
to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch be
tween the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MULTIMEDIA 151
5
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted
in some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
ð
page 272.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
152 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on
in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within
the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using the
Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
braking performance under various driving conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
● ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (which you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
● Brake pedal pulsations
● A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function optimally with
the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
● The ABS contains sophisticat
ed electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
● Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
● The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
● The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
● The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual
and auditory notification. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. The
system will activate automatically if a rear door was
opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being placed
in the ON/RUN position. When the previous conditions
are met, RSRA displays the message “Check Rear
Seat” on the instrument cluster display and sounds an
auditory alert upon the driver placing the ignition in the
OFF position to exit the vehicle.
SAFETY 153
6
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) — IF
EQUIPPED
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued and
warns the driver to pull over and take a break.
To Activate/Deactivate
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
Uconnect system by selecting the following in order:
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Alert”
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does not
relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving the
vehicle. If you experience fatigue while driving, pull
over safely for a break without waiting for the DDD
warnings. Only return to the road when you are in
the right physical and mental condition to prevent
endangering yourself and other drivers.
System Warnings
The DDD system uses driver and vehicle inputs to
calculate when the driver is feeling drowsy. If the
system detects that the driver is drowsy, an audible
chime will be heard and the DDD graphic will display on
the cluster screen.
If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the
system by pushing the OK button on the steering wheel,
the message will disappear from the display.
If the driver does not acknowledge the warning
provided by the system, the message will remain on
the screen for one minute.
NOTE:
● In the event of a DDD system failure, an amber
symbol will appear in the instrument cluster display
along with a dedicated message.
● If the ABS activates, “ABS ACTIVE” will display in
place of the DDD symbol and will remain active until
the ABS deactivates.
DDD Warning Message
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work together to
enhance both vehicle stability and control in various
driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Rain
Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and/or
Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
154 SAFET
Y
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that
provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving
conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives
is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability.
The only notification the driver receives that the feature
is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque.
It is very important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible
for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for dangerous wheel lift
by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially dangerous cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and
may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance
that dangerous wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of dangerous wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the these conditions. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired
path.
● Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
● Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
SAFETY 155
6
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
● Electr
onic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
● Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
(Continued)
WARNING!
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively
affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will
be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only
be used for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button, located below the radio. The ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off
in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable
to allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished
by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button to
enter “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring
“Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
● When in “P
artial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
● Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle
maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is
entered by pushing and holding the ESC OFF button
for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and
the engine is running. After five seconds, the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate and the “ESC OFF”
message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
156 SAFETY
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) feature described in the TCS section,
are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of
40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the system
returns to “Partial Off” mode. TCS remains off. When
the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the
ESC system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle
speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road driving.
However, ESC function returns to provide the stability
feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESC
OFF Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC
is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an audible
chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into
the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are disabled. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine running. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (km) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when Traction
Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
● The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
● Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) — If
Equipped
The ESS activates the hazard lights at a faster than
normal speed when heavy brake pressure is applied.
ESS will only activate when the speed is above 31
mph (50 km/h). The ESS operates independently of
other lamps, and will turn on and off automatically. This
indicates to others that the vehicle is stopping quickly.
NOTE:
● A warning light will illuminate within the instrument
cluster to inform the driver that the ESS feature has
been activated.
● When towing a trailer, ESS will also activate the rear
indicator lights of the trailer.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low speed off-
road driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle
speed while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
controlling the brakes.
SAFETY 157
6
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, located in
front of the gear selector. The following conditions must
also be met to enable HDC:
● The driveline is in 4WD Low.
● The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
● The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
● The driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater
than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver and can be adjusted within the
thresholds by using throttle or brake application.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation speed with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
● Driv
er overrides HDC set speed with a speed
exceeding 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 25
mph (40 km/h).
● Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level
ground, or is on an uphill grade.
● Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
● The driver pushes the HDC switch.
● The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
● The driver’s door opens.
● The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
● The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
● The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then
extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch
when enable conditions have not been met.
The HDC switch is located within the Selec-Terrain knob
in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
● The feature must be enabled.
● The vehicle must be stopped.
● The parking brake must be off.
● The driver’s door must be closed.
● The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
● The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
● HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
158 SAFET
Y
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
DISABLING AND ENABLING HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
● If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, see
ð
page 61 for further information.
● If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
ð
page 129
for further information.
TOWING WITH HSA
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide assistance to
mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
● If y
ou use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
(Continued)
WARNING!
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
● HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
● Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support
is active, there is no notification to the driver and no
driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) system will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brak
e pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced
modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
ð
page 122.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
SAFETY 159
6
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the v
ehicle is star
t
ed, the BSM W
arning Light will
momentarily illuminat
e in bo
th outside rear
vie
w mirr
or
s
t
o let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is
in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
v
ehicle is in P
ARK.
The BSM de
t
ection zone co
v
er
s appr
o
ximat
ely one lane
width, 12 f
t (3.8 m), on both sides of the vehicle. The
zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
● The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
● The BSM system will automatically disable when
a trailer is detected. If the attached trailer is not
detected, the system detection zone DOES NOT
change. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane
is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire time
the vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be necessary
to deactivate the BSM system manually to avoid
misdetection
ð
page 129.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located. The system may also detect blockage if the
vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low radar
returns such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation
drop. If blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Sensor Blocked” message will display in
the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM
and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal operation.
The system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears or when an ignition
cycle occurs. To minimize system blockage, do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object
when enabled. If the turn signal is then activated, and
it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the
vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded when
chimes are enabled. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted during the chime event
ð
page 162.
160 SAFET
Y
Warning Light Location
As part of the Active Lane Management system, if the
vehicle begins to drift into an adjacent lane that has
an active LED indication, the LED will flash if steering
torque is provided to guide the vehicle back to the
center of the lane
ð
page 115.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning
light may not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls,
foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and
your vehicle does not require service.
SAFETY 161
6
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
ð
page 272.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
t
o help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking
lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume anytime
the system is enabled regardless of the chime setting.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Lights Only mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted for the
duration of the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of
the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
162 SAFETY
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced. Turn/hazard
signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests
the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Blocked Sensor
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators
in side view mirrors will be illuminated. The warning
indicators will remain illuminated until blockage
clearing conditions are met. First clear the fascia/
bumper area around the sensors of the blockage. After
removing the blockage, reset the system by cycling the
ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the
driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings and limited braking are intended to provide
the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate
the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force,
the system will compensate and provide additional
brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the
system may provide the maximum braking possible to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
ð
page 272.
NOTE:
● The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2
km/h).
● The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
● It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
● The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
SAFETY 163
6
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Settings
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 129.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this allows the
system to provide warning and autonomous braking in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or autonomous braking will be
available in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating
Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
ð
page
129
.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the
system provides possible collision warnings on objects
closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings
and provides less reaction time than the "Far" and
"Medium" settings, which allows for a more dynamic
driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
● Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking,
or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
● Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
● The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
● FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
● FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present,
the system will return to its full performance state. If
the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
164 SAFET
Y
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If
Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph (62
km/h), the system may provide maximum braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist.
If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the system
determines a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Controls settings
ð
page 129.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down. The system will
not reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
For more information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires, see
ð
page 244.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS
will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as
long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until
the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure.
NOTE:
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
SAFETY 165
6
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193
kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value
ð
page 272.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
off.
CAUTION!
● The TPMS has been optimized f
or the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor
is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall system
performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
● Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
● After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
● The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
● The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
● Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
● The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
● Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and
to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
● Receiver module
● Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
● Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which will display in the instrument cluster display
● Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
166 SAFET
Y
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "Tire Low" message, an “Inflate
to XX” message, and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
highlighted or in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those
highlighted or in a different color in the instrument
cluster display graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value, as shown in the “Inflate
to XX” message. Once the system receives the updated
tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the
pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will stop being highlighted or return to their
original color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
● Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
● Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
● Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
● Using tire chains on the vehicle
● Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
size spare tire in place of a road tire that has
a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will remain on
and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a different
color or highlighted pressure value and the “Inflate
to XX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime
will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
SAFETY 167
6
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display dashes
(--) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS
will update automatically. In addition, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn
off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(--), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will
no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
● Seat Belt Systems
● Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
● Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPOR
TANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
ð
page
186
.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as
possible and use the proper child restraint
ð
page 186
.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
168 SAFETY
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
ð
page 268 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat
belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or other items are placed on the outboard front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
SAFETY 169
6
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
● In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Be sure e
veryone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
● A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
● A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
(Continued)
WARNING!
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
● A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
● A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
● A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
● A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
● A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
(Continued)
170 SAFETY
WARNING!
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6.
To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot
at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
SAFETY 171
6
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
(Continued)
WARNING!
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
● Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
● Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt
with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate
and buckle (if equipped) should remain connected at
all times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle become
disconnected, they must be properly reconnected prior
to the rear center seat belt being used by an occupant.
1. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
172 SAFET
Y
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle.
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle, insert the regular latch plate into the
center red slot on the mini-buckle.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
WARNING!
● If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to
provide proper restraint and will increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
● When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch
plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and
reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
● Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in
the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
SAFETY 173
6
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These de
vices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system
ð
page 192.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract
to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
174 SAFET
Y
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
● The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
(Continued)
WARNING!
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
● Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
● Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first
in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
SAFETY 175
6
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs,
have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
● The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
● The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean y
ou won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
ð
page 69.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front
air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front
air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
4 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
● Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
176 SAFETY
WARNING!
● Ne
ver install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
● No objects should be placed o
ver or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
● Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
● Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it
takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
SAFETY 177
6
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
● Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor.
The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine
the front passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
● The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
● The fr
ont passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
ployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child re-
straint system, including a rear-facing child restraint,
in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
(Continued)
WARNING!
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
● Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where
that weight is located. The OCS communicates the
classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the
classification to determine whether the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
● Sitting upright
● Facing forward
● Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
● Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
178 SAFET
Y
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS
determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front
passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in a full-power
deplo
yment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
● The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest
or instrument panel).
● The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
● The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
● The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
● Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
● Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
● Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
● Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY 179
6
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
● If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
(Continued)
WARNING!
occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
● Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different than the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, which
may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do
not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
● Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
● Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
● Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
● Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
● At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related component
or fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
● U
napproved modifications or service procedures
to the passenger seat assembly, its related
components, seat cover or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment in
case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
(Continued)
180 SAFETY
WARNING!
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
● If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
WARNING!
● Do no
t drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
● Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mount
ed Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deplo
ys, it opens the seam on the
outboar
d side of the seatback’s trim co
v
er
. The inflating
SAB deploys thr
ough the seat seam int
o the space
be
tw
een the occupant and the door. The SAB moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflat
es. Children are at an e
v
en great
er risk of injur
y
from a deplo
ying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
SAFETY 181
6
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge
of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure
occupants if they are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
● Do no
t mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
● In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
● Occupants, including children, who are up against
or v
ery close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
● Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING!
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
● Side Air Bags need r
oom to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
● Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
● Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
182 SAFETY
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● F
ront and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
● The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants
as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However,
if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
● As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manuf
acturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
● Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
● After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
● Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
● Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
● Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
SAFETY 183
6
● Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from
the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System
● Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
● Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
● Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, place the ignition in the STOP (OFF)
position to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by
following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
R
eset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active,
a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn
the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held
for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn
Signal Switch Must be
placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ON/
RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held
for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
3. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOL-
ID.
6. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
184 SAFETY
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held
for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
9. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOL-
ID.
10. Turn left turn signal
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition
MAR/ON/RUN. (Entire se-
quence needs to be com-
pleted within one minute
or sequence will need to
be repeated).
System is now reset and
the engine may be start-
ed.
Turn hazard flashers OFF
(Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
● Modif
ications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
● It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
● Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
SAFETY 185
6
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
(Continued)
WARNING!
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
● For additional information, refer to
http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
● Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
https://tc.canada.ca/en/
road-transportation/child-car-seat-safety
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have
no
t reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
186 SAFETY
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Ne
ver install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing
direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or
rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before
adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the
vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
● When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
SAFETY 187
6
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat
belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching
can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position
the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether An-
chor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
188 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 189
6
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH
system has three vehicle anchor points for installing
LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child
seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but
no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the
seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage
to install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
Yes You can install child restraints with flexible lower an-
chors in the center position. The inner anchorages are
16 inches (400 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
190 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector to
attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten
the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing
mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear
seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position.
You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the
outboard positions.
Please see
ð
page 191 for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the
seat belt, following the instructions below. See
ð
page 192
to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat
can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
SAFETY 191
6
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for
the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
ð
page 194 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-
fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● F
ollow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor
can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked,
the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
ð
page 174
for additional information on ALR.
192 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
SAFETY 193
6
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined,
you may recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step
5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See
ð
page 194 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat, including
the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach
the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the
tether anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See
ð
page 189 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat
forward to provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint
and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
194 SAFETY
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
WARNING!
● An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injury to
the child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
● Do no
t leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until
the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
ð
page 168.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
SAFETY 195
6
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or
turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
● ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
● ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor
(Continued)
WARNING!
mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
● ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with
the vehicle properly parked with the engine off,
fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference.
If your floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
● ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● It is recommended t
o only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for
cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and
bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
196 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
● Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
● If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
● If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer
inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent
body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
● Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such
as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
● Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any
abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until
repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
SAFETY 197
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Emergency Stop
Signal (ESS)
ð
page 157.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time
to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazar
d Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
SOS Mirror
If eq
uipped, the R
ear
vie
w mirr
or contains an SOS
butt
on.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
(Continued)
WARNING!
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
ð
page 272.
● The SOS button will only function if you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if
your Brand Connect service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
SOS Call
1. Press or hold the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located next to the SOS button
on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to an SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
● Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
● The vehicle brand
● The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the r
oad. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
● Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator,
the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to determine
if additional assistance is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and provide
them with important vehicle information and GPS
coordinates.
WARNING!
● If an
yone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable network
and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
● The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
(Continued)
WARNING!
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
● Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
● The Rearview Mirror light located next to the SOS
button will continuously illuminate red.
● The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
● An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
7
WARNING!
● Ignoring the R
earview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
● The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the system
is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
● The ignition is in the OFF position
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
● The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable
or obstructed
● Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
● Operator error by the SOS operator
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
● Weather
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
ð
page 272.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
● Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
● Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
● Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
● The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
(Continued)
Scan me
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the rear
storage compartment, below the spare tire.
NOTE:
Items may vary depending on the trim level.
Jack And Tools Location
1 — Jack
2 — Alignment Pin
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
5 — Screwdriver
1. Open the liftgate.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
7
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
Spare Tire Removal
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire, and
remove the spare wheel from the vehicle. The jack
will be found beneath.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle, rotate
the jack counterclockwise, and lift it from the foam
tray.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or har
d stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
pre
vent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Alw
ays park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
● Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
● Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
● Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
● Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
● Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
● Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
● If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
● To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1
.
Remo
v
e the spare tire, jack
, and wheel bolt
wrench.
2.
If eq
uipped with aluminum wheels where the
cent
er cap cov
ers the wheel bolts, use the wheel
bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts
on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jack locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking
locations.
Jacking Locations
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations o
ther than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
4. Jack lifting points can be identified by a triangular
symbol on the outer rocker panel. Place the jack
underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat
tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage
the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the
sill cladding.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
7
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat
tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
mak
e the v
ehicle less stable. It could slip of
f the
jack and hur
t someone near it. Raise the v
ehicle
only enough t
o remo
v
e the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly
and thread the pin int
o the wheel hub to assist in
mounting the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
● For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install
a center cap or wheel cover on the compact
spare.
● For additional warnings, cautions, and
information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation
ð
page 254.
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in
a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice
ð
page 262. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack
assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure
the assembly using the means provided. Release
the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
Damaged Tire Stowage
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
14. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it far
enough so that it is secured. Once placed in
position, rotate it clockwise to lock it in. Replace
the alignment pin in the center hole to lock the
jack in place.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up
to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.
Tire Service Kit can be used in outside
temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This
kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor
behind the rear seat.
Scan me
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
●
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
7
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
●
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn the Tire Service Kit on. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
the Tire Service Kit off.
●
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
overinflated.
● When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the
material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be
peeled off and properly discarded.
● For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
● You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob
is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less
than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your
vehicle.
● Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
● Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
○ If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
○ If the tire has any sidewall damage.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
○ If the wheel has any damage.
○ If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
● Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
● A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● T
ake care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if
inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin.
It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
● Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex.
In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty
of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a
physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
● Selecting Sealant Mode
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem
and then screw the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant
Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the vehicle is running before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing through
hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as
high as 70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8
bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the Sealant
Bottle is empty. Continue to operate
the pump and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the driver-side
door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at
the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
● The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on
the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in
the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8
km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
7
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50
mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem,
and then screw the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power
outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting
at the end of the hose onto the valve
stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on
the tire and loading information label
located in the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure
to the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area
in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
● For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
● The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
● R
eplace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to
the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to
ensure optimum operation of the system.
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly, so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the engine
compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
● T
ake care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
7
Positive (+) Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition
to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over
the positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach,
set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is
OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A “ground”
is an exposed metallic/unpainted part of the
engine, frame or chassis, such as an accessory
bracket or large bolt. The ground must be away
from the battery and the fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged batt
ery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes,
and then start the engine in the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and reinstall
the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a Capless Fuel System. If emergency refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert the
refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care
to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
Fuel Funnel Location
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
7
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
● Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
● Strong smell of coolant
● White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
● Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or st
eam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
● On highways — slow down.
● In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
● Turn off the Air Conditioner (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
● Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the
mode control to floor and the blower control to high.
This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector cannot
be moved out of the PARK position, you can use
the following procedure to temporarily move the gear
selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Grab the boot material rearward of the gear
selector and pull up to carefully separate the gear
selector bezel and boot assembly from the center
console.
Gear Selector Bezel
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right
rear corner of the gear selector assembly), and
push and hold the override release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
212 IN CASE OF EMER
GENCY
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on
the gear selector. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button (if necessary), to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle
ð
page 155. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
● Racing the engine or spinning the wheels ma
y
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
● When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
● Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes pr
ocedures f
or t
o
wing a disabled
v
ehicle using a commer
cial t
o
wing ser
vice.
T
o
wing Condi-
tion
Wheels OFF The
Gr
ound
4X4 MODELS
Flat T
o
w
NONE
NO
T ALLOWED
Wheel Lif
t Or
Dolly T
o
w
R
ear NOT ALLOWED
Front NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
devices to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
NOTE:
● You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature
is disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid
inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The
Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled
via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
● Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is
engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the
rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle
onto a flatbed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
7
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
battery is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is not
in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing
this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
time the driver's door is opened by pressing the brake
pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK so that
the vehicle can be moved
ð
page 212.
CAUTION!
● Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
● When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
● Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
● Do not use a fascia/bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face
bar will be damaged.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF mode. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
4X4 MODELS
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite
end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
● F
ront or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
● Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer's instructions.
● Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow
bar or other towing devices to main structural
members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or
associated brackets.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's
side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to
the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks Location
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Tow Hook Location
Vehicles With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and
subsequently in OFF, without opening the door. During
towing, remember that not having the aid of the power
brakes and the electromechanical power steering will
require greater force when applying the brakes and
steering of the vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
● Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks
(Continued)
CAUTION!
for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact
ð
page 183.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle
ð
page 185.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument
cluster. This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-
trips, trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil” or
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset
by referring to the steps described under Instrument
Cluster Display
ð
page 61.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under these
conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
● Check engine oil level
● Check the operation of the interior and exterior lights
● Check the 12V battery terminals. cables and
connections
● Check the brake pads, rotors, brake operation and
fluid level
● Check the steering, suspension, chassis
components and axle boots
● Check the wiper and washer operation, wiper blades
and reservoir
● Check the coolant fluid reservoir(s)
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required
maintenance intervals. More frequent maintenance
may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving. In some extreme
conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the
maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
8
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
1
X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 1
50,000 miles (2
40,000 km) whiche
ver comes
f
ir
st.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valv
e if necessar
y. X
WARNING!
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
1
The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
218 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
8
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
● Crosshatched zone.
● Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
● Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
● Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
y
our engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
● Batt
ery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
(Continued)
WARNING!
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water
ð
page 209
.
● Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
● Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
● It is essential when replacing the cables on the
batt
er
y that the positiv
e cable is attached t
o the
positiv
e post and the negative cable is attached
t
o the negativ
e post. Batter
y posts are marked
positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on
the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
● If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting
voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform
all service operations in an expert manner. Service
Manuals are available which include detailed service
information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection
ð
page 266.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage y
our engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is
unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 216.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case
of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
8
WARNING!
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter by rotating at the hinge
and pulling the cover away from the engine.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
● Use only refrigerants and com
pressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book,
located in your owner’s information kit, for further
warranty information.
● The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-
friendly substance with a low global-warming potential.
It is recommended that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
222 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured
by the moving fan blades.
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across the ribbed surface of the belt, from rib
to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason
to replace a belt. However, cracks running along a
rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks
running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the
belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or
severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
● Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
● Rib or belt wear
● Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
● Belt slips
● Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
● Belt broken
● Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use
of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.
BOD
Y LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based
grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they
are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
8
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out
of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
ma
y be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up
position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from
the arm and with one finger push the release tab
toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of
the wiper arm.
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper
blade from the wiper arm with the other hand
(move the wiper blade down toward the base of
the wiper arm and away from the J hook in the end
of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip
of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly
into the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click). Fold down
the latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the
glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest
to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left
hand, hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far
enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from
the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
8
4. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the
glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
● Exhaust gases can injure or kill. The
y contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
(CO), follow these safety tips:
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ Do no
t run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
○ If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
○ If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heating
or cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
● A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
● The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
● Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
(Continued)
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause
the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs,
stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to
cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
● Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
● Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SY
STEM
WARNING!
● Y
ou or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
● Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition is
in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
ð
page 216.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information
ð
page 266.
NOTE:
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use
of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
8
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period,
it is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When
adding engine coolant:
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
● Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
● Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling syst
em.
NOTE:
● It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
an authorized dealer.
● Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
(Continued)
WARNING!
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
WARNING!
● Do no
t open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is o
v
er
heat
ed. Do no
t loosen or remo
v
e the cap t
o
cool an o
verheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
● Do no
t use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the
ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure
cap unless checking for engine coolant freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of
this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or
high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
● Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
● Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisf
actory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 216.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately
if the Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on
the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake fluid
ð
page 266.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
8
WARNING!
● Use only the manuf
acturer recommended brake
fluid
ð
page 266. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
● To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
● Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
● Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 8-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified transmission
fluid
ð
page 266. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder. For fluid specifications
ð
page 266.
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
General Information
WARNING!
● When replacing a blo
wn fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
● Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
● If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blo
wn fuse)
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the
engine compartment.
Power Distribution Center/Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location are printed on the inside of
the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Underhood Power Distribution Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
8
FUSES
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F02 – – Spare
F03 – – Spare
F04 30 Amp Tan – Rear Defroster (EBL)*
F05 – – Spare
F06 40 Amp – TTM*
F07 40 Amp – Smart Electric Oil Pump
F08 20 Amp – SLM Feed LT*
F09 30 Amp – Power Feed
F10 20 Amp – SLM Feed RT*
F11 30 Amp –
BCM Feed 3 / (Run/Start & FB Relay and
Start/Stop & FB Relay in BCM) / Aux PDC
Power Feed
F12 40 Amp – BSM Pump
F13 40 Amp – BSM Valves
F14 – – Spare
F15 40 Amp – Starter Motor Solenoid Fuse
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F16 – – –
F17 40 Amp – HVAC Fan
F18 30 Amp – Brake Vacuum Pump
F19 – 2 Amp Micro Fuse Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F20 – 7.5 Amp
Engine Control Module (ECM) / Rad Fan
Coil Relay
F21 – – Spare
F22 – 7.5 Amp AC Compressor
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 7.5 Amp Side Mirrors Defrost
F25 – 20 Amp LT HID Lamp
F26 – 20 Amp
Lumbar Adjust (Driver Seat Only) / Driver
& Pass Front Heater Seat SW / Driver &
Pass Rear Heater Seat SW / BVP RLY Coil
F27 – 25 Amp
Engine Control Module (ECM) / Fuel Injec-
tors / Snsr GPF EGT
F28 – 15 Amp LTR Coolant Pump
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F29A & B – – Spare
F30 – 20 Amp RT HID Lamp
F31 – 15 Amp
Wireless Charging Pad / SW Bank Lower
2 / SW Bank Lower LT & RT / Port UCI 2
F32 – 20 Amp
Fuel Injectors / Ignition Coils / Ignition
Coil Capacitors
F33 – 10 Amp Relay Coil Power Control Relay*
F34A & B – – Spare
F35 – – Spare
F36 – 10 Amp Port UCI 2 / Mod CVPM
F37 – 20 Amp Surge Solenoid / Surge Solenoid Bypass
F38 – 10 Amp
ECM / TCM / AGSM / DCSM / STM / Fuel
Pump Relay Coil / SEOP / TCM 8-Speed
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 15 Amp Trans Control Module Feed #1 8-Speed
F41 – – Spare
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F42 – – Spare
F43 – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Trans Control Module Feed #2 8-Speed
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 30 Amp
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) AWD
Power
F47 – 30 Amp Front Windshield Defrost*
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 5 Amp
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) ECU
Power
F51 – – Spare
F52 – 5 Amp
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module
(AGSM)
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp RR Power Outlet (12 Volt APO)
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – 20 Amp Fuel Pump
F62 – 5 Amp Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F63 – – Spare
F64 – 10 Amp
MOD DCSD / Handsfree Liftgate / UCI +
USB Port / HRLS
F65 – 20 Amp Horn
F66 – 20 Amp Cigar Lighter*
F67 – 10 Amp Engine Control Module (ECM)
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel lower cover.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger
F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver
F36 20 Amp Yellow
Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Electronic Steer-
ing Lock, Power Folding Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV
F37 10 Amp Red
Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC)
Blower
F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Electronic Steering Lock,
Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor, Start Stop Switch
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
8
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera, Climate Con-
trol, Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane
Mod
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
F94 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit -
If Equipped
To access the fuses, remove the storage bin from the
left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Rear Fuse Box Location
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse Holder
No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and
Fuse Holder No. 2 (If equipped with trailer towing) is
located closest to the front of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The fuse may be contained in an In-line Fuse holder (If
equipped with a Sunroof or Power Inverter Module).
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F1 10 Amp
Red
TTM IGN Feed*
F5 15 Amp
Blue
Controller Exterior Light-
ing Lights (Driver’s Side)*
F6 15 Amp
Blue
Controller Exterior Light-
ing Lights (Passenger
Side)*
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F7 10 Amp
Red
TTM Jumper Battery
Feed*
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F2 30 Amp
Green
Memory Seat
F3 20 Amp
Yellow
Sunroof*
F4 30 Amp
Green
Power Seat (Passenger
Side)
F5 30 Amp
Green
Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp
Brown
Power Lumbar (Power
Seats)
F8 20 Amp
Yellow
Heated Seats*
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket,
there is a Maxi Fuse Holder for the Power Liftgate and
an ATO / UniVAL Fuse Holder for the HIFI Audio System.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01
30 Amp
Green
Power Liftgate*
* If Equipped
Cavity
ATO / Uni-
VAL Fuse
Description
F02
25 Amp
Clear
HIFI Audio System*
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this
section includes bulb description and replacement part
numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without
Retractable Roof)
C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With
Retractable Roof)
C5W
Interior Lights HT-168
Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamps LED
High Beam Headlamps LED
Front Position/Daytime Running
Lights (DRL)/Front Directional -
Premium
LED
Front Direction Indicator & Posi-
tion Lamps - Base
7442NA
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
8
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Side Marker Lamp Base:2825
Front Fog Lamps
Base: H11LL/
Premium LED
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED
Tail/Brake Lights
Premium Tail
Lights: LED
Base Tail Lights:
W21/5WLL
Turn Indicators
W21WLL For Pre-
mium Tail Lamps
W21/5WLL For
Base Tail Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)
LED
License Plate Lamp LED
Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL
Liftgate Lamp Tail LED
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with
the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is
cold, to avoid the danger of burns.
Turn Signal Light/Position Lights (Base)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open hood.
2. Reach behind headlamp near the radiator.
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a
counterclockwise direction and remove the bulb
and bulb socket. Pull the bulb axially to remove it
from the socket.
5. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them
clockwise making sure that it is properly locked.
6. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Close hood.
Front Fog Lights (Base)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
replace the bulb.
Fog Lamp Bulb
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the
bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Side Indicators
The Side Indicators are LED. See an authorized dealer
for replacement.
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
● Position lights
● Stop lights
● Direction indicator
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners covering
the screws.
240 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the
release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding it away
from the back of the vehicle.
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning and
removing the bulb housing.
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp
1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Ball Studs
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
7. Reposition the rear body side lamp assembly on
the car.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to align
the ball studs.
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp
assembly.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
Reverse Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access panel for
body side lamps, remove liftgate access cover for
liftgate lamps.
Liftgate
1 — Liftgate Access Covers
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the
release.
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is
properly locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access panels making sure they are
locked in correctly.
7. Finally close the liftgate.
NOTE:
Refer to an authorized dealer for service.
3rd Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
8
License Plate Lights
The License Plate light is LED. See an authorized dealer
for replacement.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy
light assembly.
Front Courtesy Light
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as
shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb
housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light
housing making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure that it
is properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the mirror
frame with the mirror light cover attached.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side
contacts, and then insert the new bulb, making
sure that it is properly locked between the
contacts.
Visor
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure
that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull
the bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown; remove
the dome light.
Grab Handle/Dome Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side
contacts.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push bulb
holder to the side.
Bulb Holder
2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the housing.
Bulb Holder
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
8
3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb.
Bulb
WARNING!
● Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into
account the technical characteristics can cause
malfunctions with the risk of fire.
● Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
● Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in
contact with the fingers, reduces the intensity of
the emitted light and you can also affect the life
of the lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the
bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol and allow
to dry.
NOTE:
It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced by an
authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE:
● P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
● European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
● LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for LT-
Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
● Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
● High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15
LT.
244 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
● Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
● "R" means radial construction, or
● "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diame
ter in inches (in)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
8
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
● A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
● A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
● The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
●
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
●
LL = Light load tire or
●
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicat
es the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
● This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 01 means the year 2001
● Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
8
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity
if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and
cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard
ð
page 121.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity
if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and
cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded
ð
page 121.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
8
● If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only and may
not be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
● For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
● Safety
● Fuel Economy
● Tread Wear
● Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
● Im
properly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
● Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
● Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Ov
erinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
● Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
● Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
● Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
● Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
● Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
● Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
● Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
alw
a
ys reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
8
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21
kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C)
for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation
pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer
or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
● The tire has not been driven on when flat.
● The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
● The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6
mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it
is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a R
un Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a
Run Flat tire is changed after being driven under a Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the
TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
ð
page 165.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping
ð
page 213.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generat
ed by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced
ð
page 253.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
● Driving style.
● Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
● Distance driven.
● Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
The Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed
ð
page 253
. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
ð
page 244.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do no
t use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
● Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
8
WARNING!
● F
ailure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different All Season tires. All Season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,
be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use
of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires
can be identified by a mountain/snowflake
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120
km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
ð
page 205.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
ð
page
125
.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full-Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full-Size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use Full-Size spare tire needs to be replaced.
Since it is not the same as your original equipment
tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on
the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the
driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like
the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed
on your Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall
it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following
snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
● Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
● No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
● Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
AWD
Trim Level
Axle
Tire/Wheel
Size
Snow Trac-
tion Device
(Maximum
Projection
Beyond Tire
Prof
ile Or
Equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Latitude
Lux
Trailhawk
Limited
Front None None
NOTE:
Any aftermarket tire add on like tire chains may affect
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) feature
performance.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
8
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
● Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
● Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
● Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
● Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
● Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
● Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. Always
use the suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48
km/h).
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off
Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 216.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of eq
ual size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire
size can cause damage to the power transfer unit.
Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance
tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned
by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
8
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend taking the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
● Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
● Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days, an “Extended Park Starting Procedure” is
required to start the vehicle
ð
page 80.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s
door. When reconnecting the positive and negative
terminals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is
in the OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your
vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and
other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
● Stone and gravel impact.
● Insects, tree sap and tar.
● Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
● Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or str
ong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended, or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and
fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
8
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
● Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
● If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
● Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
● Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
● Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
● Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
● If y
ou driv
e on salt
ed or dusty r
oads or if y
ou drive
near the ocean, hose of
f the under
carriage at least
once a month.
● It is impor
tant that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
● If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
● If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
● If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
● If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
● Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
● Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
● Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
● For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
● For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
● Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
260 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or
if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
● Direct contact of air freshener
s, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior
may cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
● Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
clo
th. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
windshield and is visible from the outside of the
vehicle.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes
as standard equipment. In the event power assist is
lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake
applications with the engine off), the brakes will still
function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with
the power system operating.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition,
if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the
brake fluid in the master cylinder drops, the Brake
Warning Light will turn on.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will
make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using
a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb (135
N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that
thesocket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
262 TECHNICAL SPECIFICA
TIONS
Torque Pattern
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque
to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do no
t tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see
a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine
failureand may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
requirements, and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance, when using
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will
allow these engines to operate to optimal performance.
This increase in performance is most noticeable in hot
weather or other heavier load conditions, such as while
towing.
METHANOL
(Methyl) is used in a variety of concentrations when
blended with unleaded gasoline. You may find fuels
containing 3% or more methanol along with other
alcohols called cosolvents. Problems that result from
using methanol/gasoline are not the responsibility of
the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made
from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
WARNING!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems and may damage critical fuel system
components.
ETHANOL
The manufacturer recommends that your vehicle be
operated on fuel containing no more than 15% ethanol.
Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may
reduce the risk of exceeding this 15% limit and/or of
receiving fuel with abnormal properties. It should also
be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should
be expected when using ethanol-blended fuels, due
to the lower energy content of ethanol. Problems that
result from using methanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
CAUTION!
Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than 15%
may result in engine malfunction, starting and
operating difficulties, and materials degradation.
These adverse effects could result in permanent
damage to your vehicle.
CLEAN AIR GASOLINE
Many gasolines are now being blended to contribute to
cleaner air, especially in those areas where air pollution
levels are high. These new blends provide a cleaner-
burning fuel and some are referred to as “reformulated
gasoline.”
The manufacturer supports these efforts toward
cleaner air. You can help by using these blends as they
become available.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner-
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 263
9
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump
labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
● Operate in a lean mode
● OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
● Poor engine performance
● Poor cold start and cold drivability
● Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
COMPRESSED NATURAL GAS (CNG) AND
LIQUID PROPANE (LP) FUEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on CNG or
LP may result in damage to the engine, emissions,
and fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL MANGANESE
TRICARBONYL (MMT)
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane
number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT
reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in
y
our vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should
ask the gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these additives will help
improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain
vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When available, the usage
of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active
solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel
system gasket and diaphragm materials.
264 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
● The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● An out-of-tune engine or cer
tain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
● The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
(Continued)
CAUTION!
recommended. Most of these products contain
high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives
is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 13.5 gal 51 L
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
2.0L Engine 9 qt 8.6 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 265
9
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of the manufacturer Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic
Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but must
have the API Donut trademark
ð
page 221.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API GL-5).
266 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 267
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
● Authorized dealer name
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
● Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if
you are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles
on the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated
from the start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as
set forth in your Warranty Information book.
1
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out
of gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or
towing as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-
free: USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869.
Provide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number,
and your location, including the telephone number from
1
Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc., 400 River's Edge Drive, Medford, MA 02155, except in AK, CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services are
provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., 275 East Hillcrest Drive, Suite 165, Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
268 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of
the problem and answer a few simple questions. You
will be given the name of the service provider and
an estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an
unsafe situation, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your
VIN, odometer mileage at the time of service, and
current mailing address. We will process the claim
based on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we
will reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually
paid, based on the usual and customary charges for
that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at
any time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject
to restrictions and conditions of use, which are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home.
We will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you
to a nearby station. This service is limited to two
occurrences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help
is just a phone call away. This service is limited to
providing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does
not cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance
will dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle
to the closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or
Ram dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you
will be responsible for the cost if the extra distance
exceeds 10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC Customer Service
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan, Puerto Rico, 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 269
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by
FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond
your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar®
Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable
protection against repair costs after your vehicle
warranties have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection
plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC
to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's
warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms
and provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr/ for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to
keep it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
Scan me
270 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect that could cause a crash
or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an
authorized dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has
a safety defect, you should contact
the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers
who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government
should contact Transport Canada,
Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510
or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-
Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
ORDERING AND ACCESSING OWNER’S
INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly
how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
●
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 271
10
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
● Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
● Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
● Exact Odometer Reading
● First and Last Name
● Phone Number
● Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
● Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
272 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
A
Active Driving Assist .........................................
101
Active Lane Management System ..................115
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...........................92
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ................228
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 264
Air Bag .............................................................. 176
Air Bag Operation ........................................177
Air Bag Warning Light ........................ 175, 177
Driver Knee Air Bag .................................... 181
Enhanced Accident Response ..........183, 215
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ........................215
Front Air Bag ................................................177
If Deployment Occurs .................................183
Knee Impact Bolsters .................................181
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 185
Maintenance ...............................................185
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ..............176
Side Air Bags ...............................................181
Transporting Pets ....................................... 195
Air Bag Light ............................................175, 195
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ................................................................ 221
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........................222
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................. 222
Air Conditioner System ....................................222
Air Conditioning Filter ............................... 45, 223
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................... 45
Air Filter ............................................................ 221
Air Pressure ............................................................
Tires .............................................................251
Alarm
Arm The System ............................................19
Disarm The System .......................................19
Security Alarm ...............................................72
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ............................................................. 9
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 153
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................................72
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................... 227, 265
Disposal ...................................................... 228
Arming System
Security Alarm ...............................................18
Assist, Hill Start ............................................... 158
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 129
Auto Down Power Windows ...............................49
Auto Hold ............................................................83
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..........................31, 32
Automatic Door Locks ....................................... 22
Automatic Headlights ........................................ 35
Automatic High Beams ......................................35
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .............. 44
Automatic Transaxle .......................................... 84
Automatic Transmission .................................... 85
Adding Fluid ....................................... 230, 266
Fluid And Filter Change ..............................230
Fluid Change ...............................................230
Fluid Level Check ....................................... 230
Fluid Type ........................................... 230, 266
Special Additives ........................................ 230
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ..... 22
Axle Fluid ..........................................................266
Axle Lubrication ............................................... 266
B
B-Pillar Location ...............................................
248
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster ................... 59
Battery ....................................................... 70, 220
Charging System Light ..................................70
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .....................14
Battery Saver Feature ........................................68
Belts, Seat ........................................................195
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................................160
Body Mechanism Lubrication .........................223
Brake Assist System ........................................154
Brake Control System, Electronic ................... 154
Brake Fluid .......................................................266
Brake System ..........................................229, 262
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................................... 262
273
11
Fluid Check ........................................ 229, 266
Master Cylinder .......................................... 229
Parking ...........................................................81
Warning Light ................................................70
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........................85
Brightness, Interior Lights .................................36
Bulb Replacement ...........................................239
Bulbs, Light ...................................................... 196
C
Camera, Rear ..........................................
117, 118
Capacities, Fuel ............................................... 265
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..............................................................121
Oil (Engine) ..................................................219
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...................... 228
Car Washes ......................................................260
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..............................197
Cargo Area Cover ............................................... 56
Cargo Load Floor ................................................56
Cargo Tie-Downs ................................................ 56
Cellular Phone ................................................. 152
Certification Label .......................................4, 121
Chains, Tire ......................................................255
Change Oil Indicator .......................................... 63
Changing A Flat Tire ........................................ 200
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................. 245
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ...................................................................77
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 195
Checks, Safety .................................................195
Child Restraint .................................................186
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................................. 187
Child Seat Installation ................................194
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....192
Infant And Child Restraints ........................187
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..189
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........187
Seating Positions ........................................188
Child Safety Locks ............................................. 22
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................... 263
Cleaning
Wheels ............................................... 256, 259
Windshield Wiper Blades ...........................223
Climate Control .................................................. 39
Automatic ...................................................... 39
Manual .......................................................... 42
Cold Weather Operation ....................................80
Compact Spare Tire .........................................254
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ............ 46
Console ...............................................................46
Floor ...............................................................46
Contract, Service ............................................. 270
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............228
Cooling System ................................................ 227
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................... 228
Coolant Level ..................................... 227, 228
Cooling Capacity .........................................265
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................... 228
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...............................227
Inspection ................................................... 228
Points To Remember ..................................229
Pressure Cap .............................................. 228
Radiator Cap ...............................................228
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ................................227, 265, 266
Corrosion Protection ........................................258
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................... 92
Cruise Light ..................................................75, 76
Customer Assistance ...................................... 268
Cybersecurity ................................................... 129
D
Daytime Running Lights ....................................
34
Defroster, Windshield ......................................195
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................................................ 34, 35
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................................................220
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..................................213
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ....................... 228
Door Ajar ...................................................... 70, 71
Door Ajar Light .............................................70, 71
Driver Memory Seat ...........................................24
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................... 25
Driving .............................................................. 126
274
E
Easy Entry Seats ................................................
28
Electric Brake Control System ........................ 154
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 153
Traction Control System .................... 157, 159
Electric Parking Brake ....................................... 81
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................155
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......... 71
Emergency Braking ......................................... 165
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ....................... 211
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................198
Jacking ........................................................ 200
Jump Starting ............................................. 209
Tow Hooks ................................................... 214
Towing ......................................................... 213
Emission Control System Maintenance ............77
Engine ..................................................... 219, 263
Air Cleaner .................................................. 221
Break-In Recommendations .........................81
Checking Oil Level ...................................... 220
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................266
Cooling ........................................................ 227
Exhaust Gas Caution .................................. 197
Fails To Start ................................................. 80
Flooded, Starting .......................................... 80
Jump Starting ............................................. 209
Oil .............................................. 221, 265, 266
Oil Filler Cap ................................................219
Oil Filter ....................................................... 221
Oil Selection ..............................221, 265, 266
Oil Synthetic ................................................221
Overheating .................................................212
Starting ..........................................................79
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . 183, 215
Ethanol ....................................................263, 264
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..................................... 197
Exhaust System ...................................... 197, 226
Exterior Lighting .................................................34
Exterior Lights ........................................... 34, 196
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................................................
221
Air Conditioning ....................................45, 223
Engine Oil .................................................... 221
Engine Oil Disposal .....................................221
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................34, 35
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................................... 198
Turn Signals ............................ 34, 36, 76, 196
Flat Tire Changing ...................................244, 254
Flat Tire Stowage .................................... 244, 254
Flooded Engine Starting ....................................80
Floor Console ..................................................... 46
Fluid Capacities ............................................... 265
Fluid Leaks .......................................................196
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ...........................................................229
Engine Oil ....................................................220
Fluid, Brake ......................................................266
Fog Lights .................................................... 34, 35
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................... 25
Folding Rear Seats ............................................ 26
Forward Collision Warning .............................. 163
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................................213
Fuel ...................................................................263
Additives ......................................................264
Clean Air ......................................................263
Ethanol ...............................................263, 264
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................................121
Gasoline ...................................................... 263
Light ...............................................................73
Materials Added ......................................... 264
Methanol .....................................................264
Octane Rating ....................................263, 266
Requirements ............................................. 263
Specifications ............................................. 266
Tank Capacity ............................................. 265
Fuses ................................................................231
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .................................
121
Gasoline, (Fuel) ................................................263
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................... 263
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................. 263
Gear Ranges ...................................................... 85
Gear Selector Override ....................................212
Glass Cleaning .................................................261
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................122
275
11
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...........................122
GVWR ................................................................121
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................
198
Head Restraints .................................................29
Head Rests .........................................................29
Headlights .......................................................... 34
Automatic ...................................................... 35
Cleaning ...................................................... 259
Delay ..............................................................35
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...34, 35
Lights On Reminder ............................... 34, 35
Passing ................................................... 34, 35
Switch ............................................................ 34
Time Delay ..............................................34, 35
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 31, 33
Heated Seats ..................................................... 28
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ................................................................. 35
Hill Descent Control .........................................157
Hill Descent Control Indicator .........................157
Hill Start Assist ................................................ 158
Hood Prop ...........................................................52
Hood Release .....................................................52
I
Idle Coasting ................................................
66, 76
Ignition ................................................................15
Switch ............................................................ 15
Inside Rearview Mirror ..............................31, 198
Instrument Cluster ............................... 58–60, 63
Audio ..............................................................67
Descriptions ........................................... 59, 60
Display ........................................................... 61
Display And Messages ................................. 64
Driver Assist .................................................. 65
Fuel Economy ................................................67
Menu Items ................................................... 64
Messages ...................................................... 67
Settings ......................................................... 68
StopStart ....................................................... 67
Trip Info ..........................................................67
Vehicle Info ....................................................66
Instrument Cluster Display
Off Road ........................................................ 67
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................... 261
Interior Appearance Care ................................260
Interior Fuses ................................................... 237
Interior Lights .....................................................36
Inverter
Power ............................................................. 47
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ..................................... 46
J
Jack Location ...................................................
201
Jack Operation ........................................200, 202
Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped.......200
Jacking Instructions ........................................
202
Jump Starting .................................................. 209
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ..............................................
19
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............15
Remote Keyless Entry ...................................13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 14
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) 15
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ..................................13, 20
Keys .................................................................... 13
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ..................
34, 36
Lane Change Assist .................................... 34, 36
Lane Management System .............................115
LaneSense ..........................................................76
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................... 170
Latches .............................................................196
Hood .............................................................. 52
Leaks, Fluid ......................................................196
Life Of Tires ......................................................253
276
Liftgate ............................................................... 53
Hands-Free ....................................................55
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ........................39
Light Bulbs ....................................................... 196
Lights ................................................................196
4WD Lock ...................................................... 75
4WD Low ....................................................... 75
Adaptive Cruise Control Set ......................... 75
Air Bag ......................................... 70, 175, 195
Anti Lock Brake System ................................72
Automatic Headlights ................................... 35
Automatic High Beam ...................................75
Battery Charge .............................................. 70
Battery Saver .................................................36
Brake Assist Warning ................................. 157
Brake Warning .............................................. 70
Bulb Replacement ......................................239
Cruise ...................................................... 75, 76
Daytime Running .......................................... 34
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .....................34, 35
Door Open ..................................................... 70
Drowsiness Detected ....................................70
Electric Power Steering Fault ....................... 71
Electronic Park Brake ................................... 72
Electronic Stability Control .................... 72, 73
Electronic Throttle Control ............................71
Engine Temperature ..................................... 71
Exterior ........................................................196
Fog ...........................................................35, 76
Forward Collision Warning ............................75
Fuel Cutoff .....................................................73
Fuel Level Sensor Fail ...................................73
Headlight Switch ...........................................34
Headlights ..................................................... 34
High Beam .............................................. 35, 76
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............... 34, 35
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 76
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................157
Hood Open .....................................................71
Illuminated Entry ...........................................37
Immobilizer Fail VPS Electrical Alarm ..........75
Instrument Cluster ........................................34
Intensity Control ............................................36
Interior ...........................................................36
LaneSense ..............................................73, 76
Liftgate Open .................................................71
Lights On Reminder ............................... 34, 35
Low Coolant Level .........................................73
Low Fuel ........................................................ 73
Low Washer Fluid ..........................................73
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........73
Oil Pressure ................................................... 71
Oil Temperature .............................................71
Park ................................................................76
Passing ................................................... 34, 35
Seat Belt Reminder .......................................71
Security Alarm ...............................................72
Service ........................................................ 239
Service 4WD ..................................................74
Service Adaptive Cruise Control .................. 73
Service Forward Collision Warning .............. 74
Service Stop Start ......................................... 74
Stop Start Active ........................................... 76
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........ 74, 165
Towing Hook Breakdown ..............................75
Traction Control ...........................................157
Transmission Fault ........................................72
Transmission Temperature .......................... 72
Turn Signals ............................ 34, 36, 76, 196
Vanity Mirror ..................................................32
Load Floor, Cargo ...............................................56
Loading Vehicle ............................................... 121
Tires .............................................................248
Locks
Auto Unlock ................................................... 22
Child Protection .............................................22
Power Door ....................................................20
Low Tire Pressure System ...............................165
Lubrication, Body .............................................223
Lug Nuts/Bolts .................................................262
Luggage Carrier ..................................................57
M
Maintenance ......................................................
52
Maintenance Free Battery .............................. 220
Maintenance Schedule ................................... 216
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....73
Manual
Service .........................................................271
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................24
Memory Seat ......................................................24
Memory Settings ................................................24
277
11
Methanol .................................................263, 264
Methanol Fuel ..................................................263
Mirrors ................................................................ 31
Automatic Dimming ................................31, 32
Heated .................................................... 31, 33
Outside ....................................................31, 32
Rearview ...............................................31, 198
Vanity ............................................................. 32
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ............................................................. 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................165
Mopar Parts ..................................................... 270
Multi-Function Control Lever .............................34
Multifunction Lever ............................................34
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period .............................
81
O
Occupant Restraints ........................................
168
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............263, 266
Oil Change Reset ............................................... 63
Oil Filter, Change ............................................. 221
Oil Filter, Selection ...........................................221
Oil Pressure Light ...............................................71
Oil, Engine ............................................... 221, 266
Capacity ...................................................... 265
Checking ..................................................... 220
Dipstick ....................................................... 220
Disposal ...................................................... 221
Filter ............................................................ 221
Filter Disposal .............................................221
Identification Logo ......................................221
Materials Added To .....................................221
Pressure Warning Light ................................ 71
Recommendation ..............................221, 265
Synthetic ..................................................... 221
Viscosity ...................................................... 265
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............................77
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual .......................................... 271
Outside Rearview Mirrors ........................... 31, 32
Overheating, Engine ........................................ 212
P
Paddle Shifters ..................................................
87
Paint Care ........................................................ 258
Parking Brake .....................................................81
ParkSense
Front And Rear ............................................105
ParkSense Active Park Assist ......................... 111
ParkSense System .......................................... 105
Pedestrian Warning System ............................165
Pets .................................................................. 195
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........248
Power
Door Locks .................................................... 20
Inverter .......................................................... 47
Liftgate .......................................................... 53
Sunroof ..........................................................50
Windows ........................................................ 49
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ....................174
Preparation For Jacking .................................. 201
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .................................................... 174
Profile Settings ................................................ 130
Programmable Features ................................. 129
R
Radial Ply Tires ................................................
252
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 228
Radio
Settings ....................................................... 129
Sound Setting ............................................. 146
Radio Operation ...............................................152
Radio Remote Controls ................................... 151
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............................ 38
Rear Camera ....................................................117
Rear Cross Path ...............................................162
Rear Seat Reminder Alert ............................... 153
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................... 26
Rear Wiper/Washer ...........................................39
Recreational Towing ........................................ 126
Reformulated Gasoline ................................... 263
Refrigerant .......................................................222
Release, Hood ....................................................52
Reminder, Lights On ................................... 34, 35
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................................ 169
278
Remote Control
Starting System .............................................17
Remote Keyless Entry ........................................13
Arm The Alarm .............................................. 19
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............15
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ..........151
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................... 17
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ........................................................ 18
Uconnect Settings .........................................18
Remote Starting System ....................................17
Replacement Tires .......................................... 253
Reporting Safety Defects .................................271
Restraints, Child .............................................. 186
Restraints, Head ................................................29
Roll Over Warning .................................................8
Roof Type Carrier ................................................57
Rotation, Tires ..................................................257
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..........................
195
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................... 196
Safety Defects, Reporting ................................271
Safety Information, Tire ...................................244
Safety Tips ....................................................... 195
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................................197
Sailing .................................................................66
Sailing Active ......................................................66
Schedule, Maintenance .................................. 216
Seat Belt Reminder ............................................71
Seat Belts ................................................169, 195
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............................171
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......171
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ................................................... 171
Child Restraints .......................................... 186
Energy Management Feature .....................174
Extender ...................................................... 173
Front Seat ...........................................169–171
Inspection ................................................... 195
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....................171
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ....................171
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................... 170
Operating Instructions ................................ 171
Pregnant Women ........................................ 174
Pretensioners .............................................. 174
Rear Seat .................................................... 170
Reminder .....................................................169
Seat Belt Extender ......................................173
Seat Belt Pretensioner ................................174
Untwisting Procedure ..................................171
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................. 260
Seats ...................................................................25
Adjustment ....................................................25
Easy Entry ......................................................28
Head Restraints ............................................29
Heated ...........................................................28
Memory ..........................................................24
Rear Folding ........................................... 25, 26
Seatback Release .........................................26
Tilting ............................................................. 25
Ventilated ...................................................... 29
Security Alarm ............................................. 18, 72
Arm The System ............................................19
Disarm The System .......................................19
Security System ................................................. 18
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................... 266
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 15
Service Assistance .......................................... 268
Service Contract .............................................. 270
Service Manuals .............................................. 271
Shift Lever Override .........................................212
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ............................... 85
Shoulder Belts ................................................. 170
Side View Mirror Adjustment ...................... 31, 32
Signals, Turn ................................ 34, 36, 76, 196
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ..............................255
Snow Tires ....................................................... 254
Spare Tires ..............................................254, 255
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ............................................266
Oil ................................................................ 266
Starting ........................................................ 17, 79
Automatic Transmission ............................... 79
Button ............................................................15
Cold Weather ................................................ 80
Engine Fails To Start .....................................80
Remote .......................................................... 17
Starting And Operating ......................................79
279
11
Starting Procedures ...........................................79
Steering
Column Controls ........................................... 34
Tilt Column .................................................... 23
Wheel, Heated .............................................. 23
Wheel, Tilt ......................................................23
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................... 151
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ............................................................ 151
Storage ............................................................... 46
Storage, Vehicle ................................................. 45
Stuck, Freeing ..................................................213
Sun Roof ......................................................50, 52
Sun Visor ............................................................ 32
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ..... 176
Surround View Camera System ......................118
Sway Control, Trailer ........................................159
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................................ 221
System, Remote Starting ...................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................
23
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............. 44
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..................................... 56
Tilt Steering Column .......................................... 23
Time Delay
Headlight ................................................ 34, 35
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............248
Tire Markings ................................................... 244
Tire Safety Information ....................................244
Tire Service Kit ................................................ 205
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped .........................205
Tires ....................................... 196, 251, 254, 257
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................... 253
Air Pressure .................................................251
Chains ......................................................... 255
Changing .....................................................200
Compact Spare ...........................................254
General Information .......................... 251, 254
High Speed ................................................. 252
Inflation Pressure ....................................... 251
Jacking ........................................................ 200
Life Of Tires .................................................253
Load Capacity .................................... 248, 249
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .. 74, 165
Quality Grading ........................................... 257
Radial .......................................................... 252
Replacement .............................................. 253
Rotation .......................................................257
Safety ..................................................244, 251
Sizes ............................................................ 245
Snow Tires .................................................. 254
Spare Tires .........................................254, 255
Spinning ...................................................... 252
Trailer Towing .............................................. 125
Tread Wear Indicators ................................253
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................262
To Open Hood .....................................................52
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................124
Tow Hooks
Emergency .................................................. 214
Towing .............................................................. 122
Disabled Vehicle ......................................... 213
Guide ...........................................................123
Recreational ............................................... 126
Weight ......................................................... 123
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..........................126
Traction Control .......................................157, 159
Traffic Sign Assist System ...............................100
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...............................159
Trailer Towing ................................................... 122
Minimum Requirements ............................ 124
Tips ..............................................................126
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................... 124
Wiring .......................................................... 125
Trailer Towing Guide ........................................ 123
Trailer Weight ...................................................123
Transaxle
Automatic ...................................................... 84
Operation ...................................................... 84
Transfer Case
Fluid .............................................................266
Transmission ......................................................85
Automatic ............................................. 85, 230
Fluid .............................................................266
Maintenance ...............................................230
Transporting Pets ............................................ 195
Tread Wear Indicators .....................................253
Turn Signals .......................................... 34, 36, 76
280
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings .........................................
18
Uconnect Settings ........................................... 129
Customer Programmable Features ............. 18
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................257
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector ...........................................................46
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..................... 171
V
Vanity Mirrors .....................................................
32
Vehicle Loading .......................................121, 249
Vehicle Maintenance .......................................221
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .......................9
Vehicle Security Alarm .......................................18
Vehicle Security System .................................... 18
Vehicle Settings ............................................... 129
Vehicle Storage .................................................. 45
Ventilated Seats .................................................29
Voice Command .................................................30
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................... 30
W
Warnings, Roll Over ..............................................
8
Warranty Information ...................................... 270
Washers, Windshield ................................ 37, 220
Washing Vehicle .............................................. 260
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ................... 256, 259
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ....................256, 259
Wind Buffeting ................................................... 50
Window Fogging .................................................45
Windows ............................................................. 49
Close ..............................................................49
Down ..............................................................49
Open .............................................................. 49
Power .............................................................49
Up ...................................................................49
Windshield Defroster .......................................195
Windshield Washers ................................. 37, 220
Fluid .............................................................220
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................223
Windshield Wipers ............................................. 37
Wipers Blade Replacement ............................ 223
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .......................................38
Wireless Charging Pad ...................................... 48
281
11
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off
the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is
moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or
provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Jeep
®
brand dealer.
First Edition
25_MP_OM_EN_USC
©2024 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
The Jeep app puts the latest in connectivity and convenience in the palm of your hand. The App provides access to your remote vehicle commands
(if properly equipped), service history, My Garage and the Digital Glovebox. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store
and enter the search keyword “Jeep” (U.S. residents only).
Scan to download
complete Owner’s
Manual, Radio and
Warranty Manuals
U.S.
mopar.com/om
owners.mopar.ca
CANADA
